BR Classification

May 31, 2014

Christianity and Church (BR1-1725) – 444 Titles

Covers more general aspects, such as

BR17-53/Christianity in Overview/General Collections      BR60-67/Early Christian Literature           BR115/Relation to Social Aspects                     BR140-1510/History of Christianity                   BR1690-1725/Biography

Updated 18 September 2018.

BR17.W55 1968   Winter, Gibson.  Religious identity: a study of religious organization.  Macmillan Company, 1968.  143p.  Appendices (including organizational charts).  #7166  .95

BR21.H3 1957   Harnack, (Carl Gustaf) Adolf von, 1851-1930. What is Christianity. Introduced by Rudolf Bultmann. Translated by Thomas Bailey Saunders. Harper & Row, Publishers: Harper Torchbooks/The Cloister Library c1957; 1st published 1900. xviii, 301p. From a series of lectures, “The Essence of Christianity,” University of Berlin, Winter 1899-1900. #10438 5.35

BR50.M22 1963   Masterpieces of Christian literature in summary form.  Edited by Frank N. Magill with Ian P. McGreal.  Harper & Row, 1963.  xxxix, 1193, v p.  [Reference to the editions indicated]  Alphabetical list of titles p. xiii-xx.  Category Index p.xxvii-xxviii.  Author Index p.1-v.  #9455  5.75

BR50.T764 1997   Troeltsch, Ernst, 1865-1923.  Religion in history: essays.  Translated by James Luther Adams and Walter F. Bense.  With an  introduction by James Luther Adams.  Fortress Press, c1991.  x, 386p.  (Fortress texts in modern theology).  #11520  4.30

BR53.B56 1947   Documents of the Christian Church.   Ed. by H. Bettenson.  Oxford, 1947.  457p., index.  #56  Appendices: A, List of Councils.  B, List of Books.  (Found)

BR53.N5   New theology.  no.1-      1964-       Edited by Martin E. Marty and Dean G. Pearman.  Macmillan.  have no. 1, 3, 5, 1964, 1966, 1968  #11900, 11901, 5063  1.50

BR60.A5713 1975   The sayings of the desert fathers: the alphabetical collection. Translated by Benedicta Ward. Foreword by Metropolitan Anthony. Cistercian Publications, c1975. iv, 228p. (Cistercian Studies; v.59). Chronological Table for Early Egyptian Monasticism p.208-209. Select Bibliography p.210-212. Cross Reference Index p.312-219. General Index p.220-225. Index of People and Places p.226-228. #13488 .55

BR60.A62 1956   Early Latin theology: selections from Tertullian, Cyprian, Ambrose and Jerome. Translated and edited by S. L. Greenslade. The Westminster Press: Icthus Edition. c1956. 415p.  (The Library of Christian Classics). Contains footnotes. Select Bibliography p.394-399. General Index p.401-408. Bible References p.409-413. Patristic References p.413-415. #15853 1.10

BR60.E27 1993   Early Christian fathers.  Newly translated and edited by Cyril C. Richardson.  In collaboration with Eugene R. Fairweather, Edward Rochie Hardy, Massey Hamilton Shepherd.  Simon & Schuster: A Touchstone Book, 1996 c1953.  415p.  Bibliographical footnoes.  Indexes.  (The Library of Christian Classics, v.1).  #10820  11.25

BR60.F3 A8 1961  Augustinus Aurelius, Saint, Bp. of Hippo.   The city of God; an abridged version from the translation by Gerald G. Walsh.  Doubleday: Image Books, 1961 c1958.  551p., index.  #57  1.45

BR63.T6 1960   Treasury of early Christianity.  Edited with an introduction by Anne Fremantle.  New American Library: Mentor Book, 1960 c1953.  511p.  Acknowledgements p.503-504.  Bibliography p.505-507.  Index.  #1463  1.07

BR65.A52E6 1958   An Augustine synthesis. Arranged by Erich Przywara. Harper & Brothers Publishers: Harper Torchbooks/Cathedral Library c1958. xiv, 496p. Contains bibliographical references. List of Abbreviations p.ix-x. Standard Translations p.xi-xii.  #13613 6.40

BR65.A6E5 1960  Augustinus Aurelius, Saint, Bishop of Hippo, 354-430.   The confessions of…  Washington Square Press, 1960 c1951.  301p.  #58.  .45

BR65.A52E6 1996   Augustinus Aurelius, Saint, Bishop of Hippo, 354-430.  St. Augustine on marriage and sexuality.  Edited by Elizabeth Clark.  The Catholic University of America Press, c1996.  xii, 112p.  (Selections from the Fathers of the Church, v.1).  Bibliographical footnotes.  Index.  #12941  15.00

BR65.A6E5 2001   Augustinus Aurelius, Saint, Bishop of Hippo, 354-430.  The confessions of…  Translated by Rex Warner.  With a new introduction and afterword by Martin E. Marty.  A Signet Classic, c2001; 1st published c1963.  xiii, 353p.  Selected Bibliography p.353.  #10633  7.40

BR65.A6.E5w bk.1 2001   Augustinus Aurelius, Saint, Bishop of Hippo, 354-430.  Saint Augustine’s childhood: Confessions, book one.  [Translated and commendtary by ] Garry Wills.  Vikding, c2001.  xvi, 191p.  Line notes accompany Ausgustine’s text p.28-79.  Notes p.190-191.  Contents: Introduction.  The Testimony.  Commentary.  Appendix: The Teacher [a dialogue between Augustine and his son].  #12404  6.45

BR65.A6E5w bk.10-11 2002   Augustinus Aurelius, Saint, Bishop of Hippo, 354-430.  Saint Augustine’s Memory: [Confessions, books 10-11].  Viking, c2002.  xii, 228p.  Contents:  Introduction.  The Testimony, book ten.  Commentary.  Appendix: The Testimony, book eleven.  List of Basic Terms p.225-228.  #12626  5.35

BR65.A6552.5 1999   Augustine, Saint, Bishop of Hippo, 351-430. On Christian teaching. Rev. Translated with an introduction and notes by R.P.H. Green. Oxford University Press: Oxford World Classics, 1999 c1997. xxvi, 168p. Note on the Text p.xxiv. Select Bibliography p.xxv. Datesp.xxvi. Explanatory Notes p.147-160. Index of Biblical Passages Cited p.161-164. Index.  #10458 8.00

BR65.A664E5 1993   Augustinius Aurelius, Saint, Bishop of Hippo, 354-430.  On free choice of the will.  Translated by Thomas Williams.  Hackett Publishing Company, c1993.  xxi, 129p.  Selected Bibliography p.xxi.  Bibliographical footnotes.  #10689  2.45

BR65.A73E5 2000   Augustinius Aurelius, Saint, Bishop of Hippo, 354-430.  The Augustine catechism: the Enchiridion on faith, hope, and love.  Translation and notes by Bruce Harbert.  Introduction by Boniface Ramsey.  Edited by John E. Rotelle.  New City Press, 2000 c1994.  144p.  Notes p.137-191.  Index.  #12623  8.55

B65.A75E52000   Augustinius Aurelius, Saint, Bishop of Hippo, 354-430. Soliloquies: Augustine’s interior diaglogue. Translation and notes by Kim Paffenroth. Introduction by Boniface Ramsey. Edited by John E. Rotelle. New City Press, c2000. 103p. (The Augustine Series, v.2). Contains bibliographical references. Index.   #14276 10.05

B65.B33E6 2005   Basil, Saint, Bishop of Caesrea, 329-379. On the human condition. Translated and introduced by Nonna Verna Harrison. St. Vladimir’s Seminary Press c2005. 126p. (Popular Patristics Series). Select Bibliography p.125-126. #13591 10.75

BR65.E633H9613 1998   Ephraem, Syrus, Saint, 303-373.  Hymns on parade.  Introduction and translation by Sebastian Brock.  St. Vladimir’s Seminary Press, 1998 c1990.  240p.  Bibliographical Note p.228-233.  Indexes.  Translation of Hymni de paradiso and section D of Commentarium in Gemisium.  #12801  5.35

BR65.G75D4813 2006   Gregory of Nyssa, ca.335-ca.394. The life of Moses. Foreword by Silas House. Translated by Abraham J. Malherbe and Everett Ferguson. HarperCollinsPublications: HarperSanFrancisco, c2006; 1st published c1978. x, 132p. (Harper Collins Spiritual Classics).  #13835 3.25

BR65.068S3 2006   The SCM Press A-Z o Origen. Edited by John Anthony McGuckin. SCM Press c2006. xx, 228p. Contains bibliographical references. Contributors p.xii-xv. Abbreviations p.xvii-xix. Bibliography p.219-228.  #14179 6.30

BR65.T346 1998   Tertullian, ca.160-ca. 230.  Apology.  De spectaculus.  With an English translation by T. R. Glover.  Minicius Felix [Octavius].  With an English translation by Gerald H. Rendall.  Harvard University Press, 1998 c1931.  xxvii, 446p.  Bibliographical footnotes.  Index.  (Loeb Classical Library [Latin Authors] 250).  #12074  10.20

BR66.C37V3J6 1969   Cassiodorus, Flavius Magnus Aurelius, 485-575. An introduction to divine and human redings. Translated with introduction and notes by Leslie Webber Jones. W.W. Norton & Company, 1969 c1946. xviii, 233p., diagrams. (Records of Civilization, Sources and Studies). Contains bibliographical footnotes. Abbreviations p.xii-xvii. Appendix p.211-219. Bibliography p.221-222. Index.  #14174 3.25

BR67.G72 1958   Strachey, Marjorie Golvile.  The fathers without theology.  George Braziller, 1958 c1957.  235p.  Chronological Table p.233-234.  Notes on Sources and Authorities p.235.  #10975  1.10

BR67.2.G35 1995   Gamble, harry Y, 1941-       Books and readers in the early church: a history of early Christian texts.  Yale University Press, 1995.  xii, 337p.  Notes p.247-334.  Index.  #9344  14.45

BR85.H574 1978   Holmer, Paul Leroy, 1916-2004. The grammar of faith. Harper & Row, Publishers c1978. xii, 212p. Contains bibliographical footnotes.  #15793 .25

BR85.K456 1960   Kierkegaard, Soren Aabye, 1813-1855.  …Attack upon “Christendom” 1854-1855.  Translated, with an introduction, by Walter Lowrie.  Beacon Press, 1960 c1944.  303p.  Notes p.295-300.  Index.  #1534  .50

BR85.K4578 1962   Kierkegaard, Soren Aabye, 1813-1855.  The present age and Of the difference between a genius and an apostle.  Rev. translation by Alexander Dru.  Introduction by Walter Kaufmann.  Harper & Row: Harper Torchbooks, c1962; translation first published as part of The present age and two minor ethico-religious treatises, c1940.  108p.  #10837  6.30

BR85.L484 1993  Lewis, Clive Staples.  God in the dock: essays on theology and ethics.  Edited by Walter Hooper.  Eerdmans, 1993 c1970.  346p., index.  #1165  12.03

BR85.S27492 1991   Schleiermacher, Friedrich, 1768-1834.  Friedrich Schleiermacher: pioneer of modern theology.  Edited by Keith Clements.  Fortress Press, 19991; 1st published c1987 (The Making of Modern Theology).  281p.  List of Selected Texts p.6.  Select Bibliography p.226-227.  Index.  #12105  8.00

BR95.H3 1960  Handbook of Christian theology; definition essays on concepts and movements of thought in  contemporary Protestantism.  Meridian: Living Age Books, 1960 c1958.  300p., chpt. bibl.  #59  Notes on the contributors, p.373-380.  1.45

BR95.S435 1955   Twentieth century encyclopedia of religious knowledge: an extension of the New Schaff-Herzog encyclopedia of religious knowledge.  Editor-in-Chief, Lefferts A. Loetscher.  Baker Book House, 1955.  2v. (xxi, 1-630, 631-1205p.)  Bibliographical footnotes.  v.1, Aachen-Kodesh.  v.2, Koeberle to Zwischen.  #5596-7  5.00/set

BR100.K47 1974   Kierkegaard, Sören Aabye, 1813-1855.  Concluding unscientific postscript.  Translated from the Danish by David F. Swenson; completed by Walter Lowrie and provided with introduction and notes. Princeton University Press, 1974 c1941; 1st published 1846.  xxi, 577p.  Editors Notes p.557-573.  Index.  #7747  3.40

BR100.S3 1958   Sayers, Dorothy Leigh, 1893-1957.  The mind of the maker.  Meridian Books: Living Age Books, 1958 c1941.  220p.  Notes p.211-220.  #12331  1.50

BR100.S517 1990   Sire, James W.  Discipleship of the mind: learning to love God in the way we think.  Inter Varsity Press, c1990.  249p.  Notes p.201-217.  A Bibliography We Can’t Live Without, compiled by Brian J. Walsh and J. Richard Middleton p.220-243.  Indexes.  #13400  .65

BR100.T373 1968   Teilhard de Chardin, Pierre, 1881-1955.  The divine milieu.  Harper Torchbooks, 1968 c1960.  1st published as Le miliu divin.  160p.  Index.  #1522  .25

BR110.J3 1958  James, William.   The varieties of religious experience; a study in human nature…  New Am. Lib.: Mentor, 1958.  406p., index.  #98  The Gifford Lectures, 1901-02.  .50

BR115.A8G67 2002   Gorringe, Timothy J. The education of desire: towards a theology of the senses. The 2000 Diocese of British Columbia John Hall Lectures. Trinity Press International, 2002 c2001. xii, 144p. List of Plates p.viii. Acknowledgements p.ix. Plates between p.52 & 53. Notes p.123-137. Suggestions for Further Reading p.139-140. Index.  #13970 2.15

BR115.A82 K4 1989   Kennedy, Dennis James, 1930-        The real meaning of the Zodiac.  Compiled and edited by Nancy Britt from a series of sermons on the Zodiac.  Special TBN Edition, c1989.  143p., diagram.  Books Helpful in Researching the Subject of the Zodiac. p.141.  #11568  .25

BR115.C3W413 2005   Weber, Max, 1864-1920. The Protestant ethic and the spirit of capitalism. Translated by Talcott Parsons with an introduction by Anthony Giddens. Routledge Classics, 2005; English ed. [c1930] 1st published as Protestantische Ethik ander Geist des Kapitalismus, 1904. xlii, 271p. Notes p.126-262. Index.  #9075r 2.15

BR115.C5S33 1976   Schaeffer,  Francis August, 1912-1984. How should we then live? The rise and decline of western thought and culture. Fleming H. Revell Company c1976. 288p., photos. Contains bibliographical references. List of Illustrations p.11-12. Acknowledgements p.13-15. Chronological Index p.259-265. Topical Index p.266-280. Select Bibliograpy p.281-288. #13627

BR115.C5S63 2006   Stark, Rodney, 1934-       The victory of reason: how Christianity led to freedom, capitalism, and western success. Random House, 2006 c2005. xvi, 281p., maps, tables. Acknowledgements p.237. Notes p.239-252. Bibliography p.253-270. Index.  #13586 7.49

BR115.C66C47 1995   Christian Coalition. Contract with the American family: a bold plan by Christian Coalition to strengthen the family and restore common-sense values. Introduction by Ralph Reed. The Ballantine Publishing Group/Random House, Inc.: Moorings `1995. xiv, 161p. Acknowledgements p.vii. Appendices: 1. Ralph Reed: Remarks to the Detroit Economic Club, January 17, 1995, p.133-145. 2. Additional Sources of Information on Pro-Family Issues p. 146. 3. How to Join with Christian Coalition p.147-150. Notes p.151-159. About Christian Coalition p.160-161.  #10306 .40

BR115.C66R44 1994   Reed, Ralph, 1961-      Politically incorrect: the emerging faith factor in American politics. With a foreword by William Bennett. Word Publishing c1994. xvi, 312p. Acknowledgements p.xv-xvi. Notes p.269-292. Index.  #10107 1.10

BR115.C8F64 1982   Fox, Matthew, 1948-   and Swimmer, Brian.  Manifesto for a global civilization.  Bear & Company, c1982.  54p.  #12944  .50

BR115.C8J46 1995   Jenson, Robert W.  Essays in theology of culture.  Willam B. Eerdmans Publishing Company, c1995.  xi, 224p.  Bibliographical footnotes.  Essays previously published, 1966-1994.  #11642  5.25

BR115.C8N5 1951   Niebuhr, H(elmut) Richard, 1894-1962. Christ and culture. Harper & Row: Harper Torchbooks, c1951. xii, 259p. Contains bibliographical footnotes. Index. Acknowledgements p.xi-xii. 16135 gift

BR115.C8T474 2006   Theology that matters: ecology, economy, and God. Darby Kathleen Ray, Editor. Fortress Press, c2006. x, 245p. Includes bibliographic references. Contributors p.vii-ix. Notes p.212-238. Index. #16237 2.15

BR115.E3B58 2004   Blank, Rebecca M. & McGarni, William. Is the market moral? a dialogue on religion, economics & justice. Brookings Institute Press c2004. xvi, 151p. (The Pew Forum Dialogues on Religion and Public Life).Acknowledgements p.xi-xiii. Notes at ends of articles. Contributors p.145-146. Index. #14356 2.15

BR115.E3T3 1960   Tawney, R. H.   Religion and the rise of capitalism; a historical study.  New Am. Lib: Mentor, 1960 c1926.  280p., notes, index.  #60  Holland Memorial Lectures.  .50

BR115.E3W4 1958   Weber, Max, 1864-1920.  The Protestant ethic and the spirit of capitalism.  Translated by Talcott Parsons.  With a foreword by R.H. Tawney.  Charles Scribner’s Sons, 1958; 1st published 1904-1905 as Die protestantische Ethik und der Geist des Kapitalismus.  xvii, 1a-e, 292p.  #9075  .25

BR115.H5B8 1950   Butterfield, H(erbert), Sir, 1900-1979. Christianity and history. Charles Scrigner’s Sons, c1950. viii, 246p. #16384 1.00

BR115.H5S83 1978   Swanstrom, Roy.  History in the making: an introduction to the past.  InterVarsity Press, c1978.  137p.  Bibliographical Notes p.133-134.  #12765  .25

BR115.H6B52 2005   The Bible, the church and homosexuality. Edited by Nicholas Coulton. Foreword by The Right Reverend Richard Harris, Bishop of Oxford. Darton, Longman & Todd c2005. x, 136p. Notes on Contributors p.vii-viii. Notes at ends of articles. Appendix: The Church of England Decades of Debate p.123-130.  #14057 5.35

BR115.H6F34 2003   Faithful conversation: Christian perspectives on homosexuality. Edited by James M. Childs Jr. Fortress Press, c2003. x, 132p. Contains discussion on questions, notes and bibliographical references for further reading at the ends of articles. #14390 7.30

BR115.H6H634 1999  Homosexuality and the Christian faith: questions of conscience for the churches. Edited by Walter Wink. Fortress Press, c1999. viii, 133p. Contains bibliographical referencs.  #13861 12.05

BR115.H6S3 1994   Scanzoni, Letha Dawson and Mollenko, Virginia Ramey.  Is the homosexual my neighbor?  rev. & upd.  Harper & Row, c1994; 1st published c1978.  xiv, 242p.  Notes p.199-230. Recommended for Further Reading p.231-234.  Indexes.  #7205r  10.55 + 12.90

BR115.H6T43 1990   Theological reflections on ministry and sexual orientation.  Pamela Dickey Young, Editor.  Trinity Press, c1990.  146p.  Contains bibliographical references.  #13226  1.05

BR115.H6W45 2006   White, Mel. Religion gond bad: the hidden dangers of the Christian right. Penguin Group: Jeremy P. Tarcher, c2006. xvi, 367p. Notes p.335-358. Acknowledgements p.359-360. Index.  #13852 6.70

BR115.H8R43 1982   Readings in Christian humanism. Edited by Joseph M. Shaw, R.W. Franklin, Harris Racsa, and Charles W. Buzicky. Foreword by Martin E. Marty. Augsburg Publishing House, c1982. 685p. Acknowledgements p.9-11 #16346 7.70

BR115.I35G48 1997   Geyer, Alan F.  Ideology in America: challenges to faith.  Westminster John Knowx Press, c1997.  x, 139p.  Notes p.125-133.  Index.  #12302  3.20

BR115.J8F34 1977   The faith that does justice: examining the Christian sources for social change.  Edited by John C. Haughley.  Paulist Press, c1977.  vi, 295p.  (Woodstock Series, 2).   Notes at the ends of chapters.  Index.  #12500  .50

BR115.P7C37955 2008   Christian political ethics. Edited by John A. Coleman. Princeton University Press, c2008. xviii, 289p. (The Ethikon Series in Comparative Ethics). Bibliographical references at the ends of chapters. Contributors p.279-280. Index.  #15017 5.25

BR115.P7C755 2007   Crossan, John Dominic, 1934-        God and empire: Jesus against Rome, then and now. Harper Collins Publishers: HarperSanFrancisco, c2007. [xiv], 257p. Contains bibliographical and biblical references. Prologue p.1-5. Epilogue p.237-242. Index. #16127 gift

BR115.P7D74 1985   Drinan, Robert Fredrick, 1920-2007. God and Caesar on the Potomac: a pilgrimage of conscience: writings and addresses on justice and peace. Preface by Jimmy Carter. Michael Glazier, c1985. xvi, 231p. Acknowledgements p.iv. Contains citations of first publication. Acknowledgements p.iv. Index.  #10801 .55

BR115.P7F746 1999   From Irenaeus to Grotius: a sourcebook in Christian political thought, 100-1625.  Edited by Oliver O’Donovan and Joan Lockwood O’Donnovan.  William B. Eerdmans Publishing Company, Inc., 1999.  xx, 838p.  Bibliographical Notes.  Indexes.  #12369  10.60

BR115.P7J6 1970   Jorstad, Erling, 1930-      The politics of doomsday: fundamentalists of the far right. Abingdon Press c1970. 190p. Contains bibliographical footnotes. Index.  #13826 6.43

BR115.P7T56 1989   Tinder, Glenn.  The political meaning of Christianity: an interpretation.  Louiana State University Press, c1989.  xi, 257p.  End Notes p.245-248.  Index.  #11945  2.15

BR115.T4N63 1997   Noble, David Franklin, 1945-2010. The religion of technology: the divinity of man and  the spirit of invention. Alfred A. Knopf: A Borzoi Book 1997. xii, 274p. Acknowledgements p.xi. Appendix: A Masculine Millenium: a Note on Technology and Gender p.209-228. Notes p.229-259. Index. A Note on the Author p.274.  #10245 5.35

BR115.P7W26 1995   Wallis, Jim.  The soul of politics: beyond “Religious Right” and “Secular Left.”  With a foreword by GarryWills and a preface by Corneel West.  Harcourt Bace and Company: A Harvest Book, c1995.  xxiii, 327p.  Notes p.305-322.  Index.  #10774  .25

BR115.S6L54 1956   Lilje, Hanns, 1899-       Kirche und welt.  Paul List Verlag, c1956.  182p.  Nachwort p.181-182.  #11436  free

BR115.S6R36 1919   Rauscenbusch, Walter, 1861-1918.  Christianizing the social order.  Macmillan, 1919.  xii, 483p., bibliographical footnotes, index.  #7652  .85

BR115.S6R4 1990   Rauscenbusch, Walter, 1861-1918.  A theology for the social gospel.  Abingdon Press, 1990; 1st published 1917.  vii, 279p.  Bibliographical footnotes.  #9570  5.15

BR115.W6P3 1988   Palmer, Parker J.  Company of strangers: Christians and the renewal of America’s public life.  Frwd. by Martin E. Marty.  Crossroad, 1988 c1981.  169p., notes. #994  1.57

BR117.T48 1983   Thompson, James J.  Christian classics revisited.  Ignatius Press, c1983; 1st published 1979-1982 in the New Oxford Review.  163p.  Guide to Further Reading p.155-163.   #13455  .25

BR118.B76 1990  Brown, David.   Invitation to theology.  Basil Blackwell, 1990 c1989.  182p., glossary p.149-170; Further reading p.171-177, index.  #488  7.16

BR118.F35 1982   Farley, Edward, 1929-           Ecclesial reflection: an anatomy of theological method.  Fortress Press, c1982.  xix, 390p. Bibliographical Footnotes.  Index.  #11939  2.15

BR118.H53 1972   Hiltner, Seward, 1909-          Theological dynamics.  Abingdon Press, c1972.  224p.  References p.202-218.  Index.  #122243  .25

BR118.K35 1992   Kepple, Robert J. and Muether, John R.  Reference works for theological research: an annotated selective bibliographical guide.  3d ed.  University Press of America, c1992.  xiv, 250p.  Index.  #9420  1.15

BR118.S685 1998   Spirituality and theology: essays in honor of Diogenes Allen. Edrik O. Springsted, editor. Westminster John Knox Press, c1998. x, 150p. Acknowledgements p.vii. Notes at ends of articles. Notes on Contributors p.149-150.  #14074 7.45

BR118.S75 1996   Stone, Howard W. and Duke, James O.  How to think theologically. 2nd ed.  Fortress Press, c2006; 1st published c1996.  x, 142p.  For Further Reading at ends of chaptrs. Glossary p.1133-138.  Notes p.139-140. Index.  #13460r  1.10 + 4.55

BR120.L62 1989   Locke, John, 1632-1704.  The reasonableness of Christianity as delivered in the scriptures.  Complete and unabridged, annotated with some references to other works of the author.  Edited and introduced by George W. Ewing.  Regnery Gateway, 1989 c1965.  xxviii, 228p.  Notes and References p.199-217.  Indexes.  #9463  8.05

BR121.F32 1947   Farmer, Herbert Henry, 1892-            God & men.  Abingdon Press, c1947.  203p.  Contains bibliographical footnotes.  Index.  On cover: Distinctive claims of the Christian faith.  First given as “The Christian Message and the World of Persons,” April 1946, The Lyman Beecher Lectures at the Divinity School of Yale University.   #13423  .45

BR121.2.B5 1963   Blamires, Harry.  The Christian mind.  The Seabury Press, c1963.  x, 181p.  Contents: Part One, The Lack of the Christian Mind  – 1. The Surrender to Secularism.  2. Thinking Christianly and Thinking Secularly.  Part Two, The Marks of the Christian Mind – 3. Its Supernatural Orientation.  4. Its Awareness of Evil.  5. Its Conception of Truth.  6. Its Acceptance of Authority.  7. Its Concern for the Person.  8. Its Sacramental Cast.  Postscript.   #13451  .55

BR121.2.P5 1964   Phillips, J(ohn) B(ertram) 1906-1982. God our contemporary. The Macmillan Company, 1964 c1960. xii, 137p.  #13556 .15

BR121.3.S65 2005   Smith, Huston. The soul of Christianity: retrieving the great tradition. HarperCollinsPublications: HarperSanFrancisco, c2005. xxviii, 191p. Acknowledgements p.167-168. Index. Plus: The Soul of Christianity: an interview with Huston Smith p.177-191.  #13849 2.85

BR123.B42 1965   Berton, Pierre.  The comfortable pew: a critical look at Christianity and the religious establishment in the new age.  Lippincott, 1965.  137p.  Bibliographical Notes p.131-137.  #1802

BR123.C58 1965   The Christian and the world: readings in theology. Foreword by John J. Wright. Compiled at the Canisianum Innsbruck. P.J. Kennedy & Sons c1965. xx, 229p. [Third of a translation series in theology]. Contains notes at the ends of articles. Editors [&] Translators p.xvi. Acknowledgements p.xvii. The Authors p.xix-xx.  #12481 .55

BR124.S67 1998   Spong, John Shelby.  Why Christianity must change or die: a Bishop speaks to believers in exile.  A new reformation of the church’s faith and practice.  HarperCollinsPublishers: HarperSanFrancisco, c1998.  xxiii, 257p.  Bibliography p.241-247.  Index.  #11587  3.15

BR127.T58 1987   Toward a universal theology of religion. Leonard Swidler, Editor. Orbis Books, c1987. viii, 256p. (Faith Meets Faith Series). Notes after articles. Contributors p.254-256. #16142 gift

BR124.T656 1993   Tolstoy, Lev, graf, 1828-1910.  My confession, my religion.  Avensblume Press, 1993; 1st published 1899.  ix, 278p.  Translated from the Russian.  #11731  5.35

BR125 .V55 1981  Visions of wonder:  an anthology of Christian fantasy.  Ed. by Robert H. Boyer & Kenneth J. Zahorski.  Avon, 1981.  240p.  #908  1.32

BR127.C46 1964   Christianity: some non-Christian appraisals.  Edited by David W. McKain.  With an introduction by Robert Lawson Slater.  McGraw-Hill, 1964.  289p.  Short Bibliography p.289.  #5509  .25

BR127.E25 1993   Eck, Diana L, 1945-      Encountering God: a spiritual journey from Bozeman to Banaras. Beacon Press, c1993. xvi, 259p. Notes p.235-244. Selected Readings p.245-251. Index.  #15790 .25

BR127.T58 1787   Toward a universal theology of religion. Leonard Swidler, Editor. Orbis Books, c1987. viii, 256p. (Faith Meets Faith Series). Notes after articles. Contributors p.254-256. #16142 gift

BR127.T6 1957   Toynbee, Arnold Joseph, 1889-1975.  Christianity among the religions of the world.  Charles Scribner’s Sons, 1957.  116p.  Index.  #5322  .25

BR128.A2B83 1970   Bultmann, Rudolf, 1884-1976.  Primitive Chrisianity in its contemporary setting.  Translated by Rhett Fuller.  World Publishing: Meridian Books, 1970- c1956.  240p.  Bibliography and Notes p.209-231.  Indexes.  #7206  .33

BR128.B8L37 2009   Largen, Kristin Johnston, 1968-       What Christians can learn from Buddhism: virethinking salvation. Fortress Press c2009. xii, 171p. (Facets Series). Notes p.161-166. Glossary p.167-169. Further Reading p.170-171.  #14053 8.60

BR128.G8J3 1985   Jaeger, Werner Wilhelm, 1888-1961. Early Christianity and Greek paideia. The Belknap Press of Harvard University, 1985 c1961. [vi], 154p. Notes p.105-144. Index.  #13592 12.05

BR128.R7 L36 1988  Lane Fox, Robin.   Pagans and Christians.  Harper & Row, 1986.  799p., bibl. notes p.683-786, index.  #486.  12.12

BR129.C75 1998   Crossan, Dominic.  The birth of Christianity: discovering what happened in the years immediately after the execution of Jesus.  HarperCollins: HarperSanFrancisco, 1998.  xxv, 653p.  Appendices [on scriptural texts] p.587-605.  Bibliography p.607-631.  Indexes.  #9659  7.45

BR129.F41 1993   Ferguson, Everett, 1933-        Backgrounds of early Christianity. 2nd ed. William B. Eerdmans Publishing Company, c1933; 1st published c1987. xxxp., 612p. photos, map. Acknowledgements p.xvii. Abbreviations p.xviii. General Bibliography p.xix-xx. Contains footnotes and bibliographies for sections. Indexes. #16091, 6.85

BR129.F56 1983   Fiorenza, Elizabeth Schlussler, 1938-        In memory of her: a feminist theological reconstruction of Christian origins. Crossroad, 1994 c1983. xxvi, 357p. Acknowledgements p.xi-xii. Notes and bibliographic references and the ends of sections. Index of Biblical references p.353-357. #16361 1.00

BR133.I753T495 2005   Thiede, Carsten Peter, 1952-2004. The Emmaus mystery: discovering evidence for the risen Christ. With an introduction by Matthew d’Ancona. Coninuum, c2005. viii, 205p., photos (part color). Notes at ends of chapters. #13850 5.75

BR135.U69 1976   Upward, Allen, 1863-           The divine mystery: a reading of the history of Christianity down to the time of Christ.  With an introduction by Robert Duncan.  Ross-Erikson, c1976; 1st published      xxxv, 384p.  Bibliographical footontes.  #10928  1.05

BR145.N6 1941  Nichols, Robert Hastings.   The growth of the Christian Church.  rev. ed.  Westminster, 1941.  380p., index.  #105  (found).

BR145.W34 1985   Walker, Williston, 1860-1922.  A history of the Christian Church.  4th ed.  [Revised by] Richard A. Norris, David W. Lotz, Robert T. Handy.  Scribner, c1985; 1st published 1918.  xii, 756p., maps.  Bibliographic Suggestions p.711-731.  Index.  #11537  4.30

BR145.2.B66 1987   Booty, John E.  The church in history.  With the assistance of a group of editorial advisors under the direction of the Church’s Teaching Series Committee.  Harper & Row, 1987 c1979.  liii, 297p., maps.  Index.  A Table of Significant Dates p.271-277.  Suggestions for Further Reading p.278-283.  (The Church’s Teaching Series; v.3)  #9456  1.00

BR145.2.J63 1995   Johnson, Paul, 1928-      History of Christianity.  Simon & Schuster: Touchstone, 1995 c1976.  556p.  Select Bibliography p.519-533. Index.  #5045  3.30

BR145.2.L35   Latourette, Kenneth Scott, 1884-1968. A history of Christianity. Rev. ed. [Expanded to cover 1950-1975 with a new foreword and supplemental bibliographies by Ralph D. Winger] Harper & Row, Publishers c1975; 1st published 1953. 2v. (           ; xxvi, 683-1552) maps. Bibliographies at ends of chapters. Supplementary Selected Bibliography p.1507-1514. Index. v.1 to A.D. 1500. v.2 A.D. 1500-A.D1975. Have: v.2.  #13619 5.25

BR145.2.M69 2002   Moynahan, Brian, 1941-    The faith: a history of Christianity.  Doubleday, c2002.  viii, 806p., black & white illus.  Selected Bibliography p.761-767.  Index.  #11894  4.50

BR150.G33 1977   Gascoigne, Bamber.  The Christians.  With photographs by Christina Gascoigne.  William Morrow & Company, c1977.  304p., photos (part color).  Sources of Quotations p.295-298.  Index.  #12381  .25

BR151.B3 1969   Bainton, Roland H.  The church of our fathers.  Scribner’s, 1969 c1950; first published 1941.  222p., drawings, index.  #7295  .50

BR157.W54 1970   Wilson, Bryan Ronald, 1926-2004. Religious sects. McGrawHill Book Company: World University Library c1970. 256p., photos, maps, facsimilies, statistical tables. Notes p.243. Acknowledgements p.244. Bibliography p.245-251. Index.  #10077 2.00

BR158.H37 1999   Harris-Shapiro, carol. Messianic Judaism: a rabbi’s journey through religious change in America. Beacon Press, c1999. viii, 218p. Notes p.190-200. Bibliography p.201-210. Acknowlegements p.211. Index.  #10135 5.35

BR160.E5 E6 1965  Eusebius Pamphilius, Bp. of Caesarea.   The history of the Church from Christ to Constantine.  Penguin, 1965.  429p., appendices, index.  #64  1.95

BR162.3.S73 2007   Stark, Rodney. Cities of God: the real story of how Christianity became an urban movement and conquered Rome. HarperCollinsPublications: Harper One, 2007 c2006. viii, 280p., illus, maps, graphs, tables. List of Maps and Illustrations Notes p.251-262. Bibliography p.263-272. Index.  #13814 7.45

BR165.C48 1993   Chadwick, Henry.  The early church.  rev. ed.  Penguin Books, 1995.  314p.  Suggestions for Further Reading p.291-297.  Index. (The Penguin History of the Church, v.1) #5120  10.50

BR165.F75 1991   Frend, William Hugh Clifford.  The early church.  Fortress Press, 1991 c1982; 1st published 1965.  ix, 273p.  Further Reading at ends of chapters.  A Bibliography of General Works on Church History p.241-242.  Chronological Guide: to 461 p.243-247.  Index.  #9345  16.05

BR165.T32 2001   Taylor, Justin, 1943-      Where did Christianity come from? The Liturgical Press: A Michael Glazier Book, c2001. xvi, 189p. Contains bibliographical references. Acknowledgements p.xi. Abbreviations p.xiii-xv. For Further Reference p.172. The “Slavonic” Josephus p.174. Glossary of Terms and Names p.177. Indexes.  #15828 4.20

BR165.T89 1984   Tyson, Joseph B. The New Testament and early Christiaity. Macmillan Publishing Company c1984; earlier publication as A study of early Christiany c1973. xviii, 458p., photos. Contains bibliographical notes at ends of chapters. List of Maps p.xv. Abbreviations p.xvii-xviii. Glossary p.439-441. Index.  #15720 .40

BR166.G7 1977   Grant, Robert McQueen, 1917-          Early Christianity and society: seven studies.  Collins, c1977.  xii, 221p.  Abbreviations p.xi-xii.  Bibliography p.193-206.  Indexes: I. Subjects and Persons.  II. Biblical References.  III. Ancient Authors and Books.  IV. Modern Authors.  #13177  1.10

BR166.J46 2008   Jenkins, Philip, 1952-        The lost history of Christianity: the thousand year golden age of the church in the Middle East, Africa and Asia – and how it died. HarperCollinsPublishers: Harper One, c2008. xii, 315p. maps, tables, chronology. List of illustrations p.vii. A Note on Names and isms p.x-xi. Notes p.263-297. Acknowledgements p.299. Index. #16206 5.20

BR166.T4713 1978   Theissen, Gerd. Sociology of early Palestinian Christianity. [1st American ed.] Translated by John Bowden. Fortress Press c1978; 1st published as Sociologie der Jesusbewagang, 1977. xii. Abbreviations p.vii-viii. Notes p.120125. Index of References.  #14077 4.50

BR170.C6 1966   Cochrane, Charles Norris.  Christianity and classical culture: a study of thought and action from Augustus to Augustine. rev. & corrected.  Oxford University Press: Galaxy Book, 1966 c1944.  523p.  Bibliographical footnotes.  Index.  #1535  .50

BR170.M33 1997   MacMullen, Ramsey, 1928-         Christianity and paganism in the fourth to eighth centuries.  Yale University Press, 1997.  282p.  Bibliography p.247-275.  Index.  #5391  4.00

BR180.F76 1996   From Constantine to Julian: pagan and Byzantine viewsA source history.  Edited by Samuel N.C. Lieu and Dominic Montremot.  Routledge, c1996.  xxi, 285p.  List of Abbreviations and Primary Sources p.ix-xviii.  Chronology of the Main Events p.xix-xxi.  Pagan and Byzantine Historical Writing on the Reign of Constantine p.1-38.  Bibliography p.263-273.  Index of Sources p.274-275.  General Index.  #12127  7.45

BR217.F744 2009   Freeman, Charles, 1947-      A.D. 381: heretics, pagans, and the dawn of the monotheistic state. The Overlook Press, 2009 c2008. xx,252p.  Acknowledgements p.x. Note on Sources and Terminology p.xviii-xx. Appendix: The Creeds of Nicea, Constantinople, and Athanasius p.205-207. Notes p.208-228. Select Bibliography p.229-236. Index.  #14261 7.50

BR252.B26 1979   Bainton, Roland Herbert, 2894-1984. The Medieval church. Krieger Publishing Company, 1979 c1962. 191p. (The Anvil Series). Chronology p.187. Bibliography p.188. Index.  #15851 1.05

BR252.D4 1973   Deanesly, Margaret, 1885-1977. A history of the medieval church, 590-1500. 9th ed.; reprinted with corrections. Methuen & Co., Ltd/University Paperbacks, 1973 c1969; 1st published 1925. vi, 283p. maps. Appendex: Western Monasticism Before Charlemagne p.259-263. Select Book List p.264-268. Leading Events, 451-1500, p.269-171. Popes, 440-1503, p.272-274. Emperors and Kings of the Romans p.274. Archbishops of Canterbury, p.275. Index.  #9685 1.05

BR252.F7813 1995   Frank, Isnard Wilhelm, 1930-2010. A concise history of the medieval church. Continuum, 1996 c1995; 1st published as Kirchengeschichte des Mittelaltes, 1990. x, 153p. Bibliography p.12-153.  #15714 .25

BR252.S68 1981   Southern, Richard William, 1912-        Western society and the church in the middle ages.  Penguin Books, 1981 c1970.  376p.  Bibliographical footnotes.  List of Popes, 590-1513, p.361-363.  Index.  (The Pelican history of the church, 2).  #11548  .25

BR252.S92 1975   Sumption, Jonathan.  Pilgrimage: an image of medieval religion.  Rowan and Littlefield, c1975.  391p., photos.  Abbreviations p.303-305.  Notes p.306-354.  Bibliography p.355-378.  Index.  #12967  1.00

BR270.D312 1957   Daniel-Rops, Henri.  Cathedral and crusade: studies of the medieval church, 1050-1350.  Translated by John Warrington.  Dutton, 1957.  644p., maps.  Bibliographical footnotes.  Chronology p.611-622.  Index. (v.3 of Histoire de l’Église du Christ)  #1464  5.32

BR305.B35 1963   Bainton, Roland H.  The reformation of the sixteenth century.  Beacon Press, 1963 c1952.  278p.  Bibliography p.262-269.  Index.  #5323  .25

BR305 .G74 1954  Grimm, Harold J.   The Reformation era, 1500-1650.  Macmillan, 1954. 675p., iollus., maps, index.  #65  Bibliography, p.617-655.  4.50

BR305.2.C5 1964   Chadwick, Owen.  The Reformation.  Reprinted with revisions.  Penguin Books, 1986 c1972; 1st published c1964.  463p.  Suggestions for Further Reading p.446-449.  Index.  (The Pelican History of the Church: 3).  #10887  .25

BR305.2.D313 1964  Daniel-Rops, Henri.   The Catholic reformation.  Doubleday: Image Books, 1964 C1962.  2v., bibl., indexes.  #114, 115  1st published in France, 1955.  2.50

BR305.2.D314 1963   Daniel-Rops, Henri.  The Protestant reformation.  Translated from the French by Audrey ButlerDoubleday: Image Books, 1963 c1961; 1st published as Une Révolution Religieuse: la Réforme Protestat, 1958.  2v. (393;      p.)  Selected Bibliography p.389-393.  Have: v.1, #5599  .50

BR305.2.O89 1993   Ozment, Steven.  Protestantism: the birth of a revolution.  Doubleday: Image Books, 1993 c1991.  270p.  Notes p.220-258.  Index.  #5151  5.35

BR305.3.M33 2005   MacCulloch, Diarmad (Ninian John) 1951-         The Reformation: a history. Penguin Books, 2005 c2003. xxviii, 832p. illustrations. List of Illustrations and Maps p.xii-xviii. Appendix of Texts p.709-711. Notes p.713-780. Further Reading p.781-788. Index. #16170 5.60

BR307.C35 1996   The Catholicity of the Reformation.  Edited by Carl E. Braaten and Robert W. Jenson.  William B. Eerdmans Publishing Company, c1996.  x, 107p.  Bibliographical footnotes.  Contributors p.107.  #10690  3.20

BR307.H642 1959  Holl, Karl.   The cultural significance of the Reformation.  Meridian: Living Age Books, 1959.  191p.  #66   Notes, p.155-191.  1st published in Germany, 1948  1.25

BR315.P96 1981   Profiles of radical reformers: biographical sketches from Thomas Müntzer to Paracelsus. Hans-Jürgen Goertz, Editor. Walter Klassan, English Edition Editor. Herald Press, c1981; 1st published as Radikale Refolrmatoren c1978. 280p., woodcuts, engravings. Bibliographical references at ends of chapters. Sources of Illustrations p.269-270. The Authors p.271-275. Index. #13907 .50 Contents: Müntzer, Karlstadt, Hut, Denck, Latzer, Gaismair, Hergot, Reuchlin, Grebel, Sattler, Hubmaier, Hutter, Marpak, Hoffman, Rothmann, Simons, Schaenkfel, Franck, Cellarius, Servetus, Paracelsus.

BR325.B16 1958  Bainton, Roland H.   Here I stand; a life of Martin Luther.  New Am. Lib: Mentor, 1958 c1950.  336p., illus., bibl., references, sources of illus, index.  #67  .50

BR325.E33 1983   Edwards, Mark U. and Tavard, George H(enri) 1922-2007. Luther: a reformer for the churches: an ecumenical study guide. Fortress Press [&] Paulist Press c1983. 96p. For Further Reading and ends of chapters. #14191 5.35

BR325.E7 1962   Erikson, Erik H.  Young man Luther: astudy in psychoanalysis and history.  Norton, 1962.  288p.  References p.269-277.  Index.  #1274  1.87

BR325.K455 2016   Kittelson, James M(atthew) and Wiersma, Hans H        1961-         Luther the reformer: the story of the man and his career. 2nd ed. Fortress Press, c2016; 1st published 1986. xxiv, 275 [276-292] illus. Bibliographical footnotes. Acknowledgements p.xiii-xiv. Chronological Table p.xix-xxiii. Notes p.255-256. Bibliography p.257-268. Indexes. #16313 gratis

BR325.L84 2003   Luther’s lives: two contemporary accounts of Martin Luther. Translated and annotated by Elizabeth Vandiver,  Ralph Keen and Thomas D. Frazel. Manchester University Press, 2003 c2002. viii, 408p. Index. Scholars Abbreviations p.vii. Contains Philip Melancthon’s History of the Life and Acts of Dr. MartinLuther (1548) p.13-34, and Johannes Cochlaeus’ The Deeds and Writings of Martin Luther from the Year of the Lord 1517 to the year 1546 (1549) p.53-351. Appendix p.353-355. Works Cited p.357-367. Notes p.368-401. #13919 10.70

BR325.M2955 1999   Marius, Richard Curry, 1933-1999. Martin Luther: the Christian between God and death. The Belknap Press of Harvard University Press, c1999. xviii, 542p. portraits. Contains bibliographical references. Illustrations p.ix-x. Notes p.489-532. Index. #16356 13.70

BR325.M299 2004   Marty, Martin (Emil) 1928-        Martin Luther: a Penguin life. Maps by Micah Marty. A Lipper/Viking Book, c2004. xx, 199p. (Penguin Lives Series). maps. Acknowledgements p.195-196. For Further Reading p.197-199. #16185 2.15

BR325.P48 2015   Pettegree, Andrew. Brand Luther: 1517, printing and the making of the Reformation. Penguin Press,c2015. xviii, 383p., illus: portraits, maps, facsimiles. List of Illustrations p.xv-xvi. Acknowledgements p.339-341. Abbreviations p.343-344. Notes p.345-368. Index. #16345 12.90

BR327.H365 1997   Harran, Marilyn J        1948-        Martin Luther: learning for life.  Concordia Publishing House, c1997.  284p., illus.  Suggestions for Further Reading p.275-277.  Index.  (Concordia Scholarship Today).  #1432  14.45

BR330.E4 1962   Luther, Martin, 1483-1546. Luther: early theological works. Edited and translated by James Atkinson. The Westminster Press c1962. 380p. (The Library of Christian Classics: Icthus Edition; v.16).Bibliography p.365-366. Indexes. Contents: Lectures on the Epistles to the Hebrews. Disputation Against Scholastic Theology. The Heidelberg Disputation. Answer to Latomus.  #13991 8.05

BR330.E5 v.21 1956   Luther, Martin, 1483-1546. The Sermon on the Mount (Sermon) and the Magnificat. Edited by Jaroslav Pelican. Concordia Publishing House c1956. xxii, 383p. (Luther’s Works, v.21). Introduction p,vii-viii. Luther’s Works on the New Testament p.ix-xv. Introduction to Volume 21 p.xvii-xxi. Index. Index to Scripture passages p.380-383. #16430 2.50

BR330.E5 v.54 1965   Luther, Martin, 1483-1546. Liturgy and hymns. Edited by Ulrich S. Leupold. Fortress Press, c1965. xx, 356p. (Luther’s Works, v.53). General Editors’ Preface p.v-vi. Abbreviations p.xi. Index of names and subjects p.345-353. Index to scripture passages. #16429 2.50

BR331.E5B7 1994   Luther, Martin, 1483-1546. Luther’s prayers. Edited byHerbert F. Brokering. Augsburg c1994; original ed. c1967. Based on the translation of Charles E. Kistler [with other sources]. 112p. Analytical Indexes p.A-D.  #14277 9.70

BR331.E5D5 1961   Luther, Martin, 1483-1546.  Martin Luther: selections from his writings.  Edited and with an introduction by John Dillenberger.  Doubleday: Anchor Books, 1961.  526p.  Selected Bibliography for Further Reading on Luther p.504-506.  Indexes.  #1480  .32

BR331.E5L7 1989   Luther, Martin, 1483-1546.   …Basic theological writings.  Edited by Timothy F. Lull.  Foreword by Jaroslav PelikanFortress Press, 1989.  xix, 755p.  Bibliographical footnotes.  #9387  3.20

BR331.E5T4 2002   Luther, Martin, 1483-1546. Faith and freedom: an invitation to the writings of Martin Luther. Edited by John F. Thronton and Susan B. Varenne. Preface by Richard Lisaker. Random House, Inc./Vintage Books: Vintage Spiritual Classics c2002. lvi, 376p. music, chronology. Contains Bible and bibliographical references. Chronology p.xxix-lii. Suggestions for Further Reading p.364-371. [Contributors] p.373. Permissions and Acknowledgements p.375-376. #15833 2.15

BR332.T4 H4 1952  Luther, Martin, 1483-1546.   The table talk of…, ed. with an introd. by Thomas S. Kepler.  World, 1952.  354p.  #69.  1.50

BR332.T6 1943  Luther, Martin, 1483-1546.   Three treatises.  Muhlenberg, 1943.  290p.  #70  To the Christian nobility; On the Babylonian captivity; On Christian liberty.  3.00

BR333.H565 2003   Hinkle, Mary E. Signs of belonging: Luther’s Marks of the Church and the Christian Life. Augsburg Fortress c2003. 94p. (Luheran Voices).Resources for Further study p.91-92. Notes p.93-94. #12404 10.00

BR333.2J63 1981   Johnson, Wayne G. Theological method in Luther and Tillich: law-gospel and correlation. University Press of America c1981. x, 194p. Acknowledgements p.v-vi. Contains bibliographical references. bibliography p.187-194. #13990 .55

BR333.2.W56 2004   Wingren, Gustaf, 1910-2000. Luther on vocation. Translated by Carl C. Rasmussen. Wipf & Stack, Publishers, 2004 c1957. xii, 256p. Contains bibliographical footnotes. Index. #13656 21.67

BR333.5P67L44 1985   Lehmann, Martin E        Luther and prayer. Northwestern Publishing House, c1985. x, 182p. Notes p.155-166. Bibliography p.167-169. Indexes. #16358 6.30

BR350.E7B3 1969   Bainton, Roland H.  Erasmus of Christendom.  Collins: Fontana Library of Theology & Philosophy, c1969.  399p., plates, drawings.  Bibliography p.371-388.  Acknowledgements for Line Illustrations p.390-392.  Index.  #12447  .55

BR375.W738 2012   Wilson, Derek, 1935-        A brief history of the English reformation. Running Press,c2012. xii, 452p. Abbreviations p.437. Notes p.407-470. Bibliography p.421-439. Index.

BR377.T48 1971   Thomas, Keith Vivian. Religion and the decline of magic. Charles Scribner’s Sons, c1971. xx, 716p. Contains footnotes. Abbreviations p.xv-xviii. Index.  #14003 5.35

BR440.C7 1990   Cragg, Gerald Robertson.  The church and the age of reason, 1648-1789.  With revisions.  Penguin Pooks, 1990 c1970; 1st published 1960.  299p.  Bibliographical Note p.285-288.  Index.  (The Penguin History of the Church, 4).  #11994  5.30

BR475.D313 1967   Daniel-Rops, Henri, 1901-  The church in an age of revolution, 1789-1970.  Translated from the French by John Warrington.  Doubleday & Company, 1967 c1965; ist published as En face des neouveau destines.  2v. (      ; 359p.)  (his History of the Church of Christ/Histoire de l’Église du Christ; v.8).  v.2. Notes p.302-309.  Chronological Table p.310-327.  Selected Bibliography p.328-329.  Index.  Contents:  v.2, parts V-VII.  #12487  .50

BR475.V5 1981  Vidler, Alec R.  Church in the age of revolution, 1789 to the present day.  rev.  Penguin Books, 1981 c1971.  302p., Suggestions for further reading p.287-94, index.  #1114  1.07

BR477.A73 1967   Altholz, Josef L., 1933-2003. The churches in the nineteenth century. The Bobbs-Merrill Company, Inc. c1967. xii, 248p. footnotes. Contains bibliographical references. Recommended Books for Further Reading p.227-229. Index.  #15878 1.10

BR515.A4 1972   Ahlstrom, Sydney E.  A religious history of the American people.  Yale University Press, 1972.  1158p.  Bibliogrpahy p.1097-1128.  Index.  #1790  19.85

BR515.B58 1993   Bloom, Harold.  The American religion: the emergence of the post-Christian nation.  Simon & Schuster: Touchstone, 1993 c1992.  288p.  Index.  #1279  3.19

BR515.C523 2007   Church, F(rank) Forrester, 1948-2009. So help me God: the founding fathers and the first great battle over church and state. Harcourt, Inc.: A Harvest Book, c2007. viii, 530p. Acknowledgements p.451-452. End Notes p.453-496. Bibliography p.497-513. Index. #16226 2.40

BR515.G42 2003   Gibbs, David C.  One nation under God: ten things every Christian should know about the founding of America.  With Jerry Newcombe.  Special Coral Ridge Ministries Association/Christian Law Association, c2003.  vii, 203p.  Chapter End Notes p.171-192.  Textbox Endnotes p.193-200.  Index of Proper Names p.201-203.  #13056  .55

BR515.H78 1976   Hudson, Winthrop S.  American protestantism.  University of Chicago Press, 1976 c1961.  198p.  Important Dates p.177-182.  Bibliographical Notes p.183-186.  Suggested Reading p.187-191.  Index.  #5587  3.00

BR515.L55 1962   Littell, Franklin Hamlin, 1917-2009. From state church to pluralism: a Protestant interpretation of religion in American history. doubleday & Company, Inc.: Anchor Books c1962. xxii, 174p. Contains bibliographical footnotes. Index. #10067 .25

BR515.M3 1961   Marty, Martin E                  1928-       The infidel: free thought and American religion.  The World Publishing Company: Meridian Books, c1961.  224p.  Nots p.205-217.  Index.  #13346  2.65

BR515.M324 1985  Marty, Martin E       1928-.  Pilgrims in their own land: 500 years of religion in America.  Penguin Books, 1985 c1984.  500p., illus., Suggested Reading p.478-488, index.  #1163  8.83

BR515.M36 2008   McElvaine, Robert S., 1947-      Grand theft Jesus : the hijacking of religion in America. Crown Publishers, c2008. xiv, 322p. Appendices: A. The Unholy Gospel p.263-267. B. A Revolutionized Creed p.269-271. C. Nine-Plus-Five Theses p.273-278. Acknowledgements p.279-280. Index.  #14352 5.30

BR515.S5 1981   Singer, C. Gregg.  A theological interpretation of American history.  Rev. ed.  Presbyterain and Reformed Publishing Company, c1981; 1st published 1964.  vii, 354p.  Bibliography p.343-347.  Index.  #11647  4.20

BR515.W494 2007   Wills, Garry. Head and heart: American Christianities. The Penguin Press c2007. xii, 626p. Key to Brief Citations p.x. Acknowledgements p.553.  Notes p.554-598. Appendices: I. Jefferson’s Virginia Statute for Religious Freedom p.599-601. II. Madison’s Memorial and Remonstrance Against Religious Assessments p.602-609. Index.  #14324 1.10

BR515.W648   Women and religion in America. Edited by Rosemary Ruether and Rosemary Skinner Keller. Harper & Row, Publishers, c1981-      v. (xiv, 353;        p.) Notes p.341-380. Index. Have: v1, The Nineteenth Century.  #11235 .75

BR516.C68 1964   Cornerstones of religious freedom in America.  Edited, with an introduction and interpretations by Joseph L. Blau.  Rev. & enl. ed.  Harper & Row: Harper Torchbooks/The Cloister Library, 1964 c1949.  xiv, 344p.  List of Sources p.338-341.  Index.  #9658  3.20

BR516.H255 2006   Harris, Sam. Letter to a Christian nation. Alfred A. Knopf c2006. xii, 98p. Ten Books I Recommend p.92. Notes p.93-96. #14312 9.15

BR516.H775 1993   Highson, Thomas, 1939-       The believer as citizen: John Courtney Murray in a new context.  Paulist Press, 1993.  185p.  Notes p.150-185.  #5537  .75

BR516.M253 1987   Maddox, Robert L. Separation of church and state: guarantor of religious freedom. Crossroad Publishing Company, c1987. [x], 96p. Notes p.193-196.  #15072 1.10

BR516.R3 1960   Religion in America: original essays on religion in a free society.  Edited by John Cogley.  Meridian Books, 1960 c1958.  288p.  Notes on Contributors p.287-288.  #1189  .43

BR516.5.W5 1969   Williams, J. Paul.  What Americans believe and how they worship.  3d ed.  Harper & Row, 1969.  x, 530p.  Notes p.493-520.  Index.  #7368  .25

BR517.P54 1988   Pierard, Richard V., 1934-         and Linder, Robert Dean.  Civil religion and the presidency.  Academic Books, 1988.  xiii, 359p.  Suggestions for Further Reading p.299-300.  Index.  #8028  1.00

BR520.D47 2007   Dershowitz, Alan M. Blasphemy: how the religious right is hijacking our Declaration of Independence. John Wiley & Sons, Inc. c2007. x, 195p. Acknowledgements p.ix. Notes p.173-186. Index.  #14291 4.25

BR526.B45 1961   Berger, Peter L.  The noise of solemn assemblies: Christian commitment and the religious establishment in America.  Doubleday & Company, c1961.  189p.  Notes p.181-189.  #11428  free

BR526.H4 1960   Herberg, Will.  Protestant-Catholic-Jew: an essay in American relgious sociology.  A new edition, completely revised.  Doubleday: Anchor Books, 1960.  ix, 309p., statistics.  Chief Works Cited or Referred To p.282-302.  Index.  #7454  .50

BR526.M35 1959   Marty, Martin E       1928-           The new shape of American religion.  Harper & Row, 1959.  180p.  Notes p.171-174.  Index.  #5537  .10

BR526.S92 2006   Suarez, Ray. The holy vote: the politics of faith in America. HarperCollingPublishers: Rayo c2006. x, 326p. Endnotes p.301-312. Index. #13823 3.20

BR535.H47 1997   Heyrman, Christine Leigh, 1950-      Southern cross: the beginning of the Bible belt c1997. xii, 336p. tables. Acknowledgements p.ix-xi. Appendix [of statistics] p.261-266. Notes p.267-324. Index. #9781 2.85

BR563.N4F72 1974   Frazier, E. Franklin, 1894-1962.  The Negro church in America [with] C. Eric Lincoln, The Black church since Frazier.  Schocken Books, 1974 c1970; 1st published 1964 as The James Gray Lectures.  vii, 216p.  Notes p.91-98.  Appendices A-F p.169-202.  Selected Bibliography p.207-208.  Index.  #8008  .55

BR746.B5 1964  Beda Venerabilis.   A history of the English Church and people.  Tr. with an introd. by Leo Sherley-Price.  Penguin, 1964 c1955.  340p., notes p.333-341.  #72  1.45

BR936.W8 1969   Wurmbrand, Richard.  Underground saints.  Feming H. Revell: Spire Book. 1969; 1st published 1968 as The Soviet Saints.  207p.  #1761  Exchange

BR1601.3.M67 2013   Moss, Candida R. The myth of persecution: how early Christians invented a story of martyrdom. HarperCollinsPublishers: HarperOne, 2012. x, 308p. Acknowledgements p.261-262. Notes p.263-293. Index. #16431 2.50

BR1640.C45 2007   Olson, Roger E. Pocket history of evangelical theology. InterVarsity Press, c2007; 1st published in the Westminster Handbook to Evangelical Theology c2004. 151p. Contains bibliographical footnotes. #13833 7.60

BR1642.U5E42 2006   El-Faizy, Monique. God and country: how evangelicals have become America’s new mainstream. Bloomsbury c2006. [vi], 262p. Notes p.245-249. Index.  #13816 1.05

BR1642.U5 F58 1988  Flake, Carol.   Redemptorama: culture, politics and the new evangelicism.  Penguin, 1988 c1985.  301p., bibl. notes p.277-291, index.  #511  1.90

BR1642.U5H86 1989   Hunter, James Davison, 1955-       American evangelicalism: conservative religion and the quandary of modernity. Rutgers University Press, 1989 c1983. xi, 171p. Appendices 1-2 p.139-144. Bibliography p.153-166. Index.  #11224 .75

BR1642.U5M37 1996   Martin, William (Curtis) 1937-      With God on our side: the rise of the religious right. Broadway Books c1996. xiv, 418p., photos. Author’s Note p.viii-xiii. Endnotes p.286-406. Index. #10219 3.70

BR1642.U5W53 2008   Wicker, Christine. The fall of the evangelical nation: the surprising crisis inside the church. HarperCollinsPublishers: Harper One, c2008. xiv, 221p. Notes p.207-214. Acknowledgements p.215. Index. #14333 1.05

BR1700.G7 1998   Grace abounding with other spiritual biographies.  By John Bunyan and others.  Edited with an introduction and notes by John Stachniewski and Anita Pacheco.  Oxford University Press, c1998.  lv, 279p.  Note on the Texts p.xliv-xlvi.  Select Bibliography p.xlvii-xlix.  A Chronology of John Bunyan and His Times p. l-lxiii.  Explanatory Notes p.229-279.  Contents: Bunyan, Grace abounding.  A relation of the imprisonment of Mr. John Bunyan.  Norwood, Confessions.  A short history of the life of John Crook.  Clarkson, The lost sheep found.

BR1705.A2V525 1969   Vitae Patrum.  English.  The desert fathers.  Translations from the Latin with an introduction by Helen Waddell.  The University of Michigan Press: Ann Arbor Paperbacks, 1966 c1936.  iii, 209p.  Notes p.203-209.  Translated from Roswyde’s 2nd rev. ed. of the Vitae Patrum, published in 1628.  #10903  .25

BR1705.A2W47 1954   The western fathers: being the lives of SS. Martin of Tours, Ambrose, Augustine of hippo, Honoratus of Arles and Germanus of Auxere. Translated and edited by F. R. Hoare. Sheed and Ward c1954. xxxii, 320p. (The Makers of Christendom). Contains bibliographical footnotes.  #13512 8.55

BR1705.P3 1989  Payne, Robert.   Fathers of the Eastern church.  Dorset, 1989 c1985.  313p., Bibl. p.299-304, Chron. p.295-98, index. #305 Formerly published as Holy Fire, 1957.  7.65

BR1710.E27 1998   Early Christian lives.  Translated, edited and with introductions by Carolinne White.  Penguin Books, c1998.  lvii, 220p., map.  Chronology  Further Reading  Contents: Antony by Athanasius.  Paul of Thebes by Jerome.  Life of Hilarion by Jerome.  Life of Malchus by Jerome.  Life of Martin of Tours by Sulpicius Severus.  Life of Benedict by Gregory the Great.  #10757  4.10

BR1720.A6A8313 1980   Athanasius, Bishop of Alexandria, c.295-373. The life of Antony and The letter to Marcellinus. Translation and introduction by Robert C. Gregg. Preface by William A. Clesch. Paulist Press c1980. xxii, 166p., map (Classics of Western Spirituality). Notes p.131-147. Indexes.  #13844 7.65

BR1720.A9B7 1969   Brown, Peter.  Augustine of Hippo: a biography.  University of California Press, 1969 c1967.  463p.  Bibliography p.435-452.  Index.  #9061  5.35

BR1720.A9H337 2000   Harrison, Carol.  Augustine: Christian truth and fractured humanity.  Oxford University Press, c2000.  xvi, 242p.  Bibliography p.223-234.  Index.  (Christian Theology in Context).  #12229  8.55

BR1720.A9O36 2006   O’Donnell, James Joseph. Augustine: a new biography. Harper Perennial: an EccoBook, 2006 c2005. xvi, 396, 16p., maps. Abbreviations for Works Cited p.337-340. Notes p.341-374. Author’s Note [acknowledgements] p.370-376. Index. P.S. – Insights, Interviews & more… p.1-16.  #13689 7.45

BR1720.A9W55 1999   Wills, Garry.  Saint Augustine: a Penguin life.  A Lipper/Viking Book, 1999.  xx, 152p.  Bibliographical Guide & Citations p.147-152.  #9450  8.90

BR1720.E8S76 1970   A new Eusebius: documents illustrative of the history of the church to A.D. 337.  Edited by J. Stevenson, based upon the collection edited by B.J. Kidd.  S.P.C.K., 1970 c1957.  427p.  Notes on Sources p.397-407.  Chronological Tables p.410-416.  Cyprian p.417.  Index.  Maps on endpapers.  #7158  3.20

BR1725.A73F9 1977   Fynn.  Mister God, this is Anna.  Illustrated by Papas.  Ballantine, 1977 c1975.  180p.  #8035  .50

BR1725.E47A3 1986   Elmer, Isabel Lincoln, 1927-       Cinderella Rockefeller.  Freundlich Books, c1987.  xiii, 217p., black & white photos, genealogy.  Index.  #11284  1.40


BC-BD Classification

May 20, 2014

Updated 16 September 2018

Philosophy’s Parts – 164 Titles

BC/Reason, Rationality, Logic                  BD/Formal Philosophy, Metaphysics, Epistemology

BC50.F63 1978   Fogelin, Robert J.  Understanding arguments: an introduction to formal logic.  Harcourt Brace Jovanovich, c1978.  xii, 351p., drawings, diagrams.  Index.  #11556  1.70

BC91.M54 bk.6 1965   Mill, John Stuart, 1806-1873.  A system of locic, Book VI: On the logic of the moral sciences.  Edited, with an introduction by Hanry M. Magid.  The Bobbs-Merrill Company: The Library of Liberal Arts, c1965; first published 1843.  xxviii, 187p.  Selected Bibliography p.xxvi.  Appendices A-F p.151-180.  Biographical Notes p.181-184.  Index.  Text based on the 8th edition, 1872.  #11546  .25

BC91.R47 1980  Rescher, Nicholas.  Induction: an essay on the justification of inductive reasoning.  University of Pittsburgh Press, 1980.  xiii, 225p.. bibliographical footnotes.  Indexes.  #7427  .55

BC108.J45 1957   Jevons, William Stanley, 1835-1882.  Elementary lessons in logic: deductive and inductive.  With copious questions and examples and a vocabulary of logical terms.  Macmillan & Co.: St. Martin’s Press, 1957 c1870.  340p., diagrams.  Questions and Exercises p.296-331. Index and Concise Vocabulary p.332-340.  #11180  3.20

BC108.R8 1954   Ruby, Lionel.  The art of making sense: a guide to logical thinking.  J.B. Lippincott Company, c1954.  286p., diagrams.  Index.  #11476  .25

BC108.S72 1966   Smith, Vincent Edward.  Éléments de logique.  Traduit de l’Américain par Thérèse Sasseville et Marie Agnès Tremblay.  2e ed.  Centre de Psychologie et de Pedagogie, 1966.  335p.  #1415  .25

BC171.B58 2005   Blackburn, Simon. Truth: a guide. Oxford University Press, c2005. xxii, 238p. Notes p.223-234. Index. #14309 13.45

BC177.N69 1993   Nozick, Robert.  The nature of rationality.  Princeton University Press, c1993.  xvi, 226p.  Notes p.183-217.  Indexes.  #12406  6.45

BC177.R345 1990   Regal, Philip.   The anatomy of judgment.  University of Minnesota Press, 1990.  368p. Additional Readings p.335-347.  Index.  #482  15.85

BC177.S28 1993   Saul, John Ralston.  Voltaire’s bastards: the dictatorship of reason in the West.  Random House: Vintage Books, 1993 c1992.  x, 612p.  Notes p.587-612.  #10217  8.55

BC177.T58   Toulmin, Stephen.  Human understanding.  Princeton University press, 1972-      3v. (519,           ), bibliographical footnotes.  Index.  v.1, General introduction and part 1.  #5352  .25

BD11.B53 1999   Blackburn, Simon.  Think: a compelling introduction to philosophy.  Oxford University Press, c1999.  vii, 312p.  Bibliography p.307-370.  Index.  #10277  15.70

BD21.C594 1975   Classic philosphical questions; 2d ed.  Edited by James A. Gould.  Charles E. Merrill Publishing Company, c1975; 1st published c1971.  x, 661p.  Suggested Readings at ends of selections.  Appendices:  I. General References p.650.  II. [Biographical notes on contributors].  Index.  #13206  1.60

BD21.E5 1981   Emmet, Eric Revell.  Learning to philosophize.  Rev.  Penguin Books, 1981 c1968; 1st published 1964.  270p.  Sources of Extracts p.267-270.  #10835  1.40

BD21.F73 1989   Frost, S        E        1899-1978.  Basic teaching of the great philosophers: a survey of their basic ideas.  rev ed.  Doubleday: Anchor Books, 1989 c1962; 1st published 1942.  301p.  Biographical Notes p.275-296.  Index.  #5881  .50

BD21.N24 1987   Nagel, Thomas.  What does it all mean?  A very short introduction to philosophy.  Oxford University Press, 1987.  101p.  #7174  .50

BD21.S375 1998   Scruton, Roger.  An intelligent person’s guide to philosophy.  Penguin Books, 1998 c1996.  168p.  Further Reading p.165.  Index.  #10467  13.85

BD31.P56 2001   Phillips, Christopher, 1959-                Socrates café: a fresh taste of philosophy.  W. W. Norton & Company, c2001.  [vi], 232p.  Glossary of Philosophers p.213-224.  Further Reading p.225-229.  Acknowledgements p.231-232.  #12519  6.45

BD32.M3 1991   Maritain, Jacques, 1882-1973.  An introduction to philosophy.  With a new foreword by Stephen J. Cicchio.  Christian Classics, 1991; 1st published 1930?  From the 1920 edition, Elements de philosophie.  xxiii, 191p., diagrams.  Bibliographical footnotes.  #1680  5.00

BD111.W52 1969   Wilshire, Bruce.  Metaphysics: an introduction to philosophy.  Pegasus, 1969.  208p.  Selected Bibliography p.201-203.  Index.  #7725  2.10

BD150.T55 q.5-6 1961   Thomas, Aquinas, Saint, 1225?1274.  Providence and PredestinationTruth, Questions 5 & 6.  Translated from the defniitive Leonine text and with an Introduction by Robert W. Mulligan.  Henry Regnery Company: A Gateway Edition, 1961; text 1st published in Veritate, c1953.  xxxii, 154p.  (Questiones disputate du veritate; 5-6).  #12936  .25

BD161.A9 1979   Ayer, Alfred Jules, 1910-1989, Sir.          Problem of knowledge.  Penguin Books, 1979 c1956. 224p..  Index.  #1096  Exchange.

BD161.B32 1980   Bateson, Gregory.  Mind and nature: a necessary unity.  Bantam Books, 1980.  259p., drawings.   Glossary p.249-253.  Index.  #1964  .30

BD161.C34 1969   Capaldi, Nicholas.  Human knowledge: a philosophical analysis of its meaning and scope.  Pegasus, 1969.  176p.  Select Bibliogra­phy p. 170-173.  Index  (Traditions in Philosophy).  #1767  2.13

BD161.B38 1960   Dewey, John, 1859-1952, and Bentley, Arthur Fisher, 1870-        Knowing and the known.  Beacon Press, 1960 c1949.  xiii, 334p.  Bibliographical notes at ends of chapters.  Index.  #9630  4.25

BD161.D4 1960   Dewey, John, 1859-1952.  The quest for certainty: a study of the relation of knowledge and action.  Gifford Lectures 1929.  G. P. Putnam’s Sons: Capricorn Books, 1960 c1929.  318p.  Index.  #7341  3.75

BD161.G74 1974   Grene, Marjorie.  The knower and the known.  University of California Press, c1974; 1st published 1964.  283p.  Notes p.267-280.  Index.  #10213  6.40

BD161.H846 1995   Human knowledge: classical and contemporary approaches.  2d ed.  Edited by Paul K. Moser and Arnold vander Nat.  Oxford University Press, 1995.  463p., bibliographical references at ends of chapters.  Indexes.  #1618  5.98

BD161.L9 1962   Lynch, William F., 1908-          The integrating mind: an exploration into Western thought.  Sheed & Ward, 1962.  viii, 181p.  #7452  1.10

BD161.O94 1992   Owens, Joseph.  Cognition: an episte­melogical inquiry.  Center for Thomistic Studies, 1992.  373p.  Notes at ends of chapters.  Index.  #3055  3.40

BD161.P719 1969   Polanyi, Michael.  Knowing and being: essays.  The University of Chicago Press, 1969.  xvii, 246p.  Bibliographic notes at ends of chaptersIndex.  #9631  4.25

BD161.R3 1969   Rand, Ayn, 1905-1982.   Introduction to objectivist epistemology.  The Objectivist, 1969 c1967.  77p., notes.  #443  First published in The Objectivist.  1.95

BD161.R3 1990   Rand, Ayn, 1905-1982.   Introduction to objectivist epistemology.  With an additional essay by Leonard Peikoff.  Expanded 2d ed.  Penguin: Meridian, 1990.  374p..  Index.  #479  10.45

BD171.A24 1984   Adler, Mortimer Jerome, 1902-      Six great ideas: truth, goodness, beauty–ideas we judge by–liberty, equality, justives–ideas we act by.  Macmillan: Collier Books, 1984 c1981.  243p.  #1262  $7.65

BD171.F47 1997b   Fernándex-Arnesto, Felipe.  Truth: a history and a guide for the perplexed.  St. Martin’s Press, c1997.  xiii, 257p.  Notes p.230-249.  Index.  #10345  12.05

BD175.I544 1990   Ingram, David B. Critical theory and philosophy. Paragon House, c1990. xxx, 240p. (Paragon Issues in Philosophy) Notes and selected bibliography at ends of chapters. Acknowledgements p.xiii. Biographical Profiles of Important Critical Theorists p.217-218. Glossary p.219-227. Index. 16188 1.00

BD177.P3 1961   Passmore, John.  Philosophical reasoning.  Scribners, 1961.  150p., bilbiographical footnes.  #5880  1.00

BD181.B76 1978   Bronowski, Jacob, 1908-1974.  The origins of knowledge and imagination.  Yale University Press, c1978.  xiii, 144p.  Bibliographical footnotes.  (The Silliman Foundation Lectures, v.44).  Index.  #12643  .25

BD215.D45 2007   DeYoung, Curtiss Paul. Living fatith: how faith inspires social justice. Fortress Press c2007. [vi], 186p. Acknowledgements p.159. Brief Biographical Setches of Twentiety Century Mustic advocates p.160-162. Endnotes p.163-175. Bibliography p.176-183. Index.  #13866 12.85

BD215.H43 2000   Hecht, Jennifer Michael. Doubt: a history. The great debaters and their legacy of innovation from Socrates and Jesus to Thomas Jefferson and Emily dickinson. HarperCollinsPublishers: HarperSanFrancisco, 2004 c2003. xxii, 551p. Notes p.495-520. Bibliography p.521-528. Acknowledgements p.529. Index.  #13677 10.75

BD215.N6 1967   Novak, Michael.  Belief and unbelief: a philosophy of self knowledge.  New American Library: Mentor-Omega, 1967 c1965. 189p.  Selected  Bibliography p.178-183.  Index.  #1135  .55

BD221.H37   Harris, James F(ranklin) 1941-      Against relativism: a philosophical defense of method. Open Court, 1993 c1992. xviii, 228p. Acknowledgements p.xvii. Notes p.195-213. Select Bibliography p.215-222. Index.  #15791 .25

BD232.G667 1996   Griffin, James, 1933-   Value judgment: improving your ethical beliefs.  Clarendon Press, c1996.  xii, 180p.  Bibliography p.169-175.  Index.  #12596  2.65

BD232.K6 1959   Köhler, Wolfgang, 1897-         The place of value in a world of facts.  Meridian Books, 1959 c1938.  xiii, 418p., bibliographical footnotes.  Index.  #7576  1.00

BD232.N484 1970   New knowledge in human values.  Edited by Abraham N. Maslow.  Foreword by Pitirim A. Sorokin.  Henry Regnery Company: A Gateway Edition, 1970 c1959.  xiv, 268p.  Bibliographical footnotes.  Biographical Notes on the Contributors p.251-258.  Index.  #10450  .75

BD241.B415 1983   Bernstein, Richard J.  Beyond objectivism and relativism: science, hermeneutics, and praxis.  University of Pennsylvania Press, 1983.  xix, 284p.  Bibliography p.268-276.  Index.  #9892  5.35

BD241.G313 1989   Gadamer, Hans-Georg, 1900-     Truth and method; 2nd rev. ed.  Translation revised by Joel Weinsheimer and Donald G. Marshall.  Crossroad, c1989; 1st English translation c1975, based on 5th German ed., Gesammelte Werke, v.1., c1986; 1st published as Warheit und method, c1960.  xxxviii, 594p.  Bibliographical footnotes.  Index.  #11954  exchange

BD311.T3 1961   Taylor, Alfred Edward, 1869-1945.  Elements of metaphysics.  Barnes & Noble, 1961 c1903.  419p., chpter bibliographies..  Index  #37.  1.95

BD331.H4313 1961   Heidegger, Martin, 1889-1976.   An introduction to metaphysics.  Doubleday: Anchor Books, 1961 c1959; 1st published in Germany, 1953.  192p..  Index.  #111  .95

BD331.M3 1962   Maritain, Jacques, 1882-1973.   A preface to metaphysics; seven lectures on being.  New American Library: Mentor Omega Books, 1962.  142p.  #112  .60

BD331.P4 1977   Pearce, Joseph Chilton.   The crack in the cosmic egg: challenging constructs of mind and reality.  Pocket Books, 1977 c1971.  219p. Bibl. p.213-219.  #491  1.04

BD411.C544 2003   Clegg, Brian.  A brief history of infinity: the quest to think the unthinkable.  Robinson, c2003.  [x], 255p., diagrams, tables, equations.  Acknowledgements p. [ix].  References p.245-249.  Index.  #13411  5.65

BD418.3.F627 2000   Fodor, Jerry A.  The mind doesn’t work that way: the scope and limits of computational psychology.  MIT Press: A Bradford Book, c2000.  xi, 126p.  References p.121-123.  Index.  (Representation and Mind).  #11265  15.00

BD418.3.S43 1995   Searle, John R.  The rediscovery of mind.  The MIT Press: A Bradford Book, 1995 c1992.  xv, 270p.  Bibliograhy p.255-261.  Indexes.  #11183  10.65

BD431.B24 1961   Baker, Herschel Clay, 1914-      The image of man: a study of the idea of human dignity in classical antiquity, the middle ages, and the Renaissance.  Harper & Brothers: Harper Torchbooks/The Academy Library, 1961 c1947.  xii, 365p.  Bibliography p.339-357.  Index.  #12325  4.00

BD431.F68 1968   Frankel, Charles.  The case for modern man.  With a new preface by the author.  Beacon Press, 1968 c1956.  240p.  Notes p.213-236.  Index.  #5882  .50

BD435.G73 2008   Gracián y Morales, Baltasar, 1601-1658. Translated by Martin Fischer. Edited with an introduction by Steven Schroeder. Barnes & Noble, 2008; 1st published 1647. xiv, 103p. Suggested Reading p.103. 16299 7.35

BD435.K874 1986   Kushner, Harold.  When all you’ve ever wanted isn’t enough.  Simon & Schuster: Summit Books, c1986.  x, 147p.  On cover: The Search for a Life That Matters.  #12753  .30

BD436.B47 1987   Bergmann, Martin S., 1913-        The anatomy of loving: the story of man’s quest to know what love is.  Columbia University Press, 1987.  xii, 302p, frontispiece.  Bibliography p.279-287.  Index.  #7634  1.00

BD436.P44 2007   Phillips, Christopher, 1959-      Socrates in Love: philosophy for a die-hard romantic. W. W. Norton & Company, c2007. 320p. Acknowledgements p.313-317. Recommended Reading p.319-320. 16344 4.10

BD436.S6 1988   Solomon, Robert C.  About love: reinventing romance for our times.  Simon & Schuster, c1988.  349p.  #10390  1.05

BD438.E83 1909   Eucken, Rudolf Christof.  The problem of human life as viewed by the great thinkers…  Translated from the German by Williston S. Hough and W.R. Boyce Gibson.  Scribners, 1909.  582p.  Indexes.  #1646  .25

BD444.H37 1977   Harrington, Alan, 1919-     The immortalist.  Celestial Arts, c1977; 1st published 1969.  [viii], 313p.  Notes p.292-308.  Index.  A book on the engineering of man’s divinity. – Preface.   #13379  .70

BD450.B39 1971   Becker, Ernest.  Birth and death of meaning: an interdisciplinary perspective on the problem of man.  2d ed.  Macmillan: Free Press, 1971.  228p.  References p.211-214.  Background Bibliography p.215-219.  Index.  #1766  1.88

BD450.B44 1971   Bernstein, Richard J.  Praxis and action: contemporary philosophies of human activity.  University of Pennsylvania Press, 1971.  xv, 344p.  Bibliography p.321-333.  Indexes.  #9094  2.15

BD450.B525 1997   Bloom, Howard K., 1943-         The Lucifer principle: a scientific expedition into the forces of history.  The Atlantic Monthly Press, 1997.  xiv, 466p.  Bibliography p.409-448.  Index.  #9002  16.00

BD450.C3 1965   Castell, Alburey, 1904-                      The self in philosophy.  The Macmillan Co., c1965.  vi, 122p.  Contains bibliographical footnotes.  Bibliography p.118-122.   #13610  4.30

BD450.F35 2002   Flanagan, Owen J., 1949-       The problem of the soul: two visions of mind and how to reconcile them. Perseus Book Group: Basic Books, c2002. xviii, 364p. Bibliographic Essay p.324-334. Selected Bibliography p.335-348. Acknowledgements p.349-350. Index.  #14432 6.40

BD450.G39 1990   Gaylin, Willard.  On being and becoming human.  Penguin Books, 1990.  292p.   Bibliographical Notes p.273-281.  Index.  #1620  1.71

BD450.M578 1985   Monasterio, Xavier O. To be human: an introductory experiment in philosophy. Paulist Press 1985. viii, 241p. Acknowledgements p.vii. Notes p.237-241.  #13653 free

BD450.N366 1988   Cicero, Marcus Tullius, 106-43 B.C.E.   The Nature of the Gods.  Translated by Horace C. P. McGregor; introduction by J. M. Ross.  Penguin Books, 1988 c1972.  278p..  Index, list of books.  #447.  7.37

BD450.N58 1968   Nobel Conference: 4th, Gustavus Adolphus College, 1968.  The uniqueness of man: a discussion.  Edited by John D. Soslansky.  North Holland Publishing Company, 1968.  189p.  Contains bibliographical notes and footnotes.  #7472  .50

BD450.S3785 2010   Schulz, Kathryn. Being worng: adventures in the margin of error. HarperCollinsPublishrs: Ecco `2010. x, 405p., photos, table. Acknowledgements p.341-344. Notes p.345-391. Index.  #14434 15.80

BD450.S766 1987   Stevenson, Leslie Foster. Seven theories of human nature. 2nd ed. Oxford University Press c1987; 1st published c1974. xii, 147p. Notes and bibliographies at ends of chapters. Index. On cover: Christianity, Freud, Lorenz, Marx, Sartre, Skinner, Plato.  #15775 2.15

BD450.T413 1969   Teihard de Chardin, Pierre, 1881-1955.  The future of man.  Translated from the French by Damien Deny.  Harper & Row, 1969 c1964.  1st published 1959 as L’Avenir de l’homme.  332p., biblographic footnotes.  Index.  #1532  .25

BD450.Z43 1995   Zeldin, Theodore.  An intimate history of humanity.  Harper Collins Publishers: Harper Perennial, 1996 c1994.  viii, 488p.  Bibliographical notes at ends of chapters.  Index.  #9184  17.00

BD511.H65 2012   Holt, Jim, 1954-      Why does the world exist? an existential detective story. W.W. Norton & Company: Liveriglit Publishing Corporation c2012. xiii, 308p. Acknowledgements p.281. Notes p.283-294. Index. #15771 3.20

BD511.L4 1947   Lecomte du  Noüy, P.  Human destiny.  New American Library: Mentor Book, 1942.  189p.  #1715  .37

BD511.M8 1961 Munitz, Milton Karl, 1913-               Space, time and creation: philosophical aspects of scientific cosmology.  Collier Books, 1961 c1957.  156p.  Contains bibliographical footnotes.  Index.  #13160  3.20

BD512.T413 1965   Teilhard de Chardin, Pierre, 1881-1955.   The phenomenon of man.  Harper: Torchbooks (The Cathedral Library) 1965 c1959; 1st published in France, 1955.  320p..  Index.  #415  .10

BD638.G64 2001   Gorst, Martin, 1960-        Measuring eternity: the search for the beginning of time.  Broadway Books, c2001.  [5], 338p., black & white photos, facsimilies.  Notes and Sources p.295-310.  Select Bibliography p.311-313.  Index.  #11978  10.65

BD638.J6613 2001   Jonsson, Bodil.  Unwinding the clock: ten thoughts on our relation to time.  Translated from the Swedish by Tiina Nunnally.  Harcourt, c2001; 1st published 1999 as Tiv Tankar om Tid.  x,150p.  Uncorrected proof.  #11261  2.15

BD638.S76 2001   Steiner, George 1929-       Grammars of creation: originating in the Gifford Lectures for 1990.  Yale Unsiversity Press, c2001 [vi], 344p.  Contains bibliographical references.  Index.  #12593  6.40

BD701.E383 1959   Eliade, Mircea, 1907-    Cosmos and history: they myth of the eternal return.  Translated from the French by Willard R. Trask.  Harper & Row: Harper Torchbooks/The Bollingen Library, c1959; 1st published c1954 as The myth of the eternal return from Le mythe d’éternal retour: archétypes et répétition c1949.  xv, 176p.  Bibliographical footnotes.  Index.  #12368  3.20

BD901.N38 1998   The necessity of friction.  Edited by Nordal Akerman.  HarperCollinsPublishers: Westview Press, c1998.  viii, 320p.  Notes at ends of articles.  About the Authors p.319-320.  #10081  5.00


B Classification

May 20, 2014

Philosophy and Philosophers – 736 titles 

B21-B69/Miscellanies, Personal Examinations, General References          B72-B105/Histories of Philosophy: General to Particular     B113-B840/ Histories & Individual Philosophers, Ancient to Modern          B841-B8414/ Philosophy & Philosophers by National Groupings

Updated 20 November 2018

B21.M3 1961 Ref   Masterpieces of world philosophy in summary form.  Edited by F. N. Magill & I.P. McGreal.  v.1, 6th century B.C. to 1800; v.2, from 1800.  Salem Press, 1961.  2v. (xxxii, 576; 577-1166, IIIp.)  Acknowlegements p.v-viii. Alphabetical List of Titles p.ix-xiv. Glossary of Common Philosophical Terms p.xix-xxxii. Author Index i-iii.  #1631, 1632  1.00

B21.P39 1994 Ref  Philosophic classics. [Edited by Walter Arnold Kaufmann & Forrest E. Baird. Prentice Hall, c1994. v.II [of IV], Medieval Philosophy. Includes bibliographical references. #16288. 6.40

B29.A73 1981   Arendt, Hannah,    -1975.  The life of the mind.  One/thinking; Two/willing.  one-volume edition.  Edited by Mary McCarthy.  Harcourt Brace: Harvest Book, 1981 c1978;  1st published 1971 & 1977.  238, 283p.  Notes p. 217-238; 219-239.  Appendix/”Judging” p.255-272.  Indexes.  #5536 16.05

B29.B446 1991  Berlin, Isaiah.  The crooked timber of humanity: chapters in the history of ideas.  Knopf, 1991.  277p..  Index.  #1074  .95

B29.B78 1968   Buber, Martin.  Between man and man.  With an afterword by the author on “The history of the dialogical principle.”  Introduction by Maurice Friedman.  The Macmillan Co., 1968 c1965; 1st published 1947.  xxi, 224p.  Bibliographical footnotes.  Indexes.  #9419  .95

B29.B82 1970   Buchanan, Scott Milross, 1895-1968.  Embers of the world: conversations with Scott Buchanan.  Participants: Harris Wofford, Jr. and others.  Edited by Harris Wofford, Jr.  The Center for the study of Democratic Institions, c1970.  xii, 226, 16-33p.  (A Center Occasional Paper v.111 no.2, Feb. 1970).  Appendices: I. Memorial Minutes, 1968-1969, Proceedings, The American Philosophical Association, Scott Buchanan, 1895-1968, p.224-226.  II. The 1937-38 Catalog of St. John’s College written largerly by Scott Buchanan p.16-33.  #13280  .15

B29.G17 1996   Gadamer, Hans-Georg, 1900-            Reason in the age of science.  Translated by Frederick G. Lawrence.  The MIT Press, 1996 c1981.  xxxiii, 179p.  Bibliographical notes at ends of articles.  Index.  (Studies in Contemporary German Social Thought, n.2).  Selected essays from the author’s Vernunft im Zietalter der Wissenschaft, c1976, and two others, c1978 & c1979.  #10911  6.95

B29.G253 1983b   Gardner, Martin, 1914-        The whys of a philosophical scrivener.  Quill, c1983.  454p.  Notes p.363-442.  Index.  #11896  7.00

B29.M457 1988   The mind’s eye: fantasies and reflections on self and soul.  Composed and arranged by Douglas R.  Hofstadter and Daniel C. Dennett.  Bantam Books, 1988 c1981.  ix, 501p.  #10189  2.65

B29.O713 1964   Ortega y Gasset, José, 1883-1955.  What is philosophy?  Translated from the Spanish by Mildred Adams.  W.W. Norton, 1964 c1960.  252p.  Based on a series of public lectures, 1929; 1st published in La Nacion (1930) with additions from Obras Completas, v.5, and Obras Ineditas.  #7443  10.60

B29.R26 1984  Rand, Ayn, 1905-1982.   Philosophy: who needs it?  Introd. by Leonard Peikoff.  New Am. Lib.: Signet, 1984 c1982.  228p..  Index.  (The Ayn Rand Library, v.1)  #392r  5.80

B29.T4 1957  This is my philosophy: twenty of the world’s outstanding thinkers reveal the deepest meanings they have found in life.  Edited by Whit Burnett.  Harper, 1957.  378p., bibliographical footnotes.  Index.  #1529  .25

B42.V55 1964  Voltaire, i.e., Marie Francois Arouet, 1694-1778.   Dictionnaire philosophique.  Chronologie et preface par Rene Pameau.  Flammarion, 1964.  373p.  #901  5.00

B42.V5513 2006   Voltaire, i.e., Marie Francois Arouet, 1694-1778.  Philosophical dictionary.  Introduced and edited by John R. Iverson.  Barnes & Noble, c2006; originally published 1764.  xxvi, 438p.  (The Barnes & Noble Library of Essential Reading).  Appendix: Selections from Chaudon’s Anti-philosophical Dictionary p.413-427.  End Notes p.429-436.  Suggested Reading p.437-438.   #13631  10.70

B51.094 1995 Ref   The Oxford companion to philosophy. Edited by Ted Henderich. Oxford University Press, c1995. xx, 1010p., illus. Contains bibliographical references with articles. List of Portraits p.xii. Contributors p.xiii-sviii. Logical Symbols p.925-926. Maps of Philosopy p.927-944. A Chronological Table of Philosophy p.945-956. sources of Illustrations p.957-958. Index and List of Entries. Ted Honderich p.1010.  #5280 32.10

B53.A9 1951  Ayer, Alfred Jules.   Language, truth and logic.  Dover Publications, 1951.  160p., bibl. notes.  Index.  #393.  1.25

B53.O8 1975   The owl of Minerva: philosophers on philosophy.  Edited and with an introduction by Charles J. Bontemps and S. Jack Odell.  McGraw-Hill, 1975.  xiv, 264p.  Books & Articles p.259-260.  Index.  #7520  2.75

B53.R4 1951  Reichenbach, Hans, 1891-1953.  Rise of scientific philosophy.  University of California Press, 1951.  333p.  #1528  .25

B67.B47 1984  Berman, Morris.  The reenchantment of the world.  Bantam Books, 1989 c1981.  366p., illus., diagrams.  Notes p.305-350.  Glossary p.351-257.  Index.  #1240r 2.65

B67.B7 1978   Bronowski, Jacob, 1908-1974.  A sense of the future: essays in natural philosophy.  Selected and edited by Piero E. Ariotti in collaboration with Rita Bronowski.  The MIT Press, 1978 c1977.  x, 286p.  References p.263-275.  Publication Record p.276-278.  Index.  #10643  1.05

B67.B97 1932  Bartt, Edwin Arthur.   The metaphysical foundations of modern physical science.  2d rev. ed.  Doubleday: Anchor Books, 1932.  352p..  Index.  Bibliography p.329-341.  #394  .95

B72.A34 1987   Adler, Moritmer Jerome, 1902-           Ten philosophical mistakes.  Macmillan Publishing Company: Collier Books, 1987 c1985.  xx, 200p.  #12975  4.30

B72.C62 v.1 1962   Copleston, Frederick Charles.  A history of philosophy.  New rev. ed.  v.1: Greece and Rome.  Doubleday: Image Books, 1962 c1946.  2pts. (319, 280p.)  Some Abbreviations Used in This Volume pt.1 p.292-294.  A Note on Sources p.295-297.  A Few Books p.298-300.  Repeated in pt.2 p.251-261.  Index in pt2.  #10326, 10327.  2.15/pt.

B72.C62 v.2 1962   Copleston, Frederick Charles.  A history of philosophy.  v.2: Medieval philosophy.  Doubleday & Company: Image Books, 1962 c1950.  2pts. (346, 352p.)  A Short Bibliography pt.1 p.324-336.  Same pt2 p.292-304.  Index  in pt.2.  Pt.1, Augustine to Bonaventure.  Pt.2, Albert the Great to Duns Scotus.  #9561, 9562  2.75

B72.C62 v.4 1994   Copleston, Frederick Charles.  A history of philosophy.  v.4: Modern philosophy from Descartes to Leibniz.  Doubleday: Image Books, 1994 c1960.  xiii, 370p.  A Short Bibliography p.333-346.  Index.  #12275  9.50

B72.C62 v.7 1965   Copleston, Frederick Charles.  A history of philosophy.  v.7: Modern philosophy.  Doubleday & Company: Image Books, 1965 c1963.  2pts. (319, 276p.)  A Short Bibliography pt. 1 p.295-308; pt.2 p.217-233.  Index in pt.2.  Pt. 1, Fichte to Hegel.  Pt.2, Schopenhauer to Nietzsche.  #13117, 12094  4.75

B72.C62 v.9 1994   Copleston, Frederick Charles.  A history of philosophy.  v.9: Modern philosophy: from the French Revolution to Sartre, Camus, and Lévi-Strauss.  Doubleday: Image Books, 1994 c1977.  xv, 480p.  A Short Bibliography p.449-468.  Index.  #10369  9.10

B72.D75 1953  Durant, Will.  The pleasures of philoso­phy: a survey of human life and destiny.   Simon & Schuster: Touchstone Book, 1953.  446p., Bibl. guide p.409-415.  Index.  Rev. ed. of The Mansions of Philosophy, 1929.  #1105  2.10

B72.D8 1957  Durant, Will.   The story of philosophy: the lives and opinions of the greater philosophers.  [2nd ed.]  Simon&Schuster, 2005 c1961; 1st published 1933.  xvii, 412p  Contains bibliographical footnotes.  Glossary p.399-401.  Bibliography p.403-404.  Index   #395r2  .50

B72.F4 1950 Ref   A history of philosophical systems. Edited by Vergilius Ferm. The Philosophical Library, c1950. xvi, 642p. Notes and Bibliography at ends of chapters. List of Contributors p.xv. Index.  #12542 5.35

B72.G337 2013   Garvey, James, 1967-         and Stangroom, Jeremy. The story of philosophy: a history of Western thought. Quercus Editions Ltd., 2013, c2012. viii, 421p. Further Readingp. 397-401. Index. Acknowledgements p.421. #16321 5.05

B72.G5 1982   Gilson, Etienne, 1884-1978.  The unity of philosophical experience.  Christian Classics/Four Courts Press, 1982 c1965 renewed; 1st published c1937.  xii, 331p.  Bibliography p.321-324.  Index to Proper Names.  On conver: A survey showing the unity of medieval, Cartesian & modern philosophy.  #12405  6.45

B72.G74 1992 Ref   Great thinkers of the Western world: the major ideas and classic works of more than 100 outstanding Western philosophers, physical and social scientists, psychologists, religious writers and theologians. Edited by Ian P. McGreal.  HarperCollinsPublishers c1992. xiv, 572p. Contributors p.xi-xiii. Bibliography p.561-570. Thinkers Index. #9327 4.83

B72.J6 1936  Joad, C. E. M.   Guide to philosophy.  Dover Publications, 1936.  592p., bibl. notes.  Index.  #396.  2.00

B72.L384 1984  Lavine, T. Z.  From Socrates to Sartre: the philosophical quest.  Bantam Books, 1984.  426p.  Further reading at ends of parts; Glossary p.415-418.  Index.  #1359  2.66

B72.M87 1993   Murdoch, Iris, 1919-1999.  Metaphysics as a guide to morals.  Penguin Books, 1993 c1992.  520p.  Acknowledgements p.513-514.  Index.  #9370  17.00

B72.O4 1967 Ref   100 great thinkers: brief biographies of the great men of thought from Hammurabi to Sartre. Editor Jay E. Green. Washington Square Press, c1967. xvi, 620p. Contains bibliographical references. [Contributors on title page]. Acknowledgements p.ix. Glossary p.593-597. Supplementary List of Great Thinkers p.601-614. Index of 100 Great Thinkers According to Field of Endeavor p.617-618. Alphabetical Index.  #7157 .95

B72.O8 2001   The Oxford illustrated history of Western philosophy. Edited by Anthony Kenny. Oxford University Press, 2001, c1994. xii, 407p. List of Maps p.9. List of Color Plates p.11-12. Chronological Table p.371-378. Further Reading p.379-391. Acknowledgement of Sources p.393-394. Index. #16416 1.00

B74.T5 1957 Ref   Thilly, Frank. A history of philosophy; 3rd ed. Rev. by Lodger Wood. Henry Holt and Company c1959; 1st published 1914. xx, 678p. Contains bibliographical references. Acknowledgements p.ix-x. Index.  #13972 2.15

B72.R82 1972  Russell, Bertrand Russell, 3d Earl, 1872-1970.   History of Western philosophy.  Simon & Schuster: A Touchstone Book, 1972.  895p..  Index.  #508  1st published 1945.  5.30

B72.T27 1993  Tarnas, Richard.  Passion of the western mind: understanding the ideas that have shaped our world view.  Ballantine, 1993 c1991.  544p.  Bibliography p.494-512; Chronology p.446-467.  Index.  #1735  8.14

B72.W54 1998   Wilson, Edward Osborne, 1929-  Consilience: the unity of knowledge.  Alfred A. Knopf, c1998.  v, 333p.  Notes p.299-319.  Acknowledgements p.321-322.  Index.  #9449  5.40

B74.H45 1956   Hawton, Hector, 1901-      Philosophy for pleasure: an adventure in ideas.  Fawcett Publications: A Premier Book, 1956 reprint of c1956; 1st published 1949.  192p.  Glossary of Terms p.182-185.  Table of Dates p.186.  Index.  #11542  .25

B77.B723 v.1 1970  Bréhier, Émile, 1876-1952.  The Hellenic age.  Translated by Joseph Thomas.  University of Chicago Press: A Phoenix Book, c1970 c1963.  v, 242p.  Bibliographies after sections.  Index.  (The history of philosophy, v.1)  1st published as Histoire de la philosophie: L’Antiquité et le Moyen Age. I: Introduction, Périod Hellénique, c1938.  Bibliographies enlarged to include works listed in the 8th French edition, 1963.  #11597  2.40

B82.D8 1969   Ducassé, Pierre.  Les grandes philosophies.  Presse Universitaires de France, 19690.  127p.  Bibliographical footnotes.  Indexes.  #5718  .50

B82.W5 1958  Windelband, Wilhelm.   A history of philosophy.  Harper: Torchbooks, 1958 c1901.  2v (347, 348-681p.), bibl. notes, appendices.  Index.  #398, 399  3.50

B105.C5 L6 1960  Lovejoy, Arthur O.   The great chain of being; a study of the history of an idea.  Harper: Torchbooks, 1960 c1936.  376p., bibl notes.  Index.  #400  1.85

B105.P4 R83 1990  Ruddick, Sara.   Maternal thinking: towards a politics of peace.  Ballantine Books, 1990, c1989.  291p., bibl. notes p.253-280.  Index.  #509  3.18

B105.S79A52 1990  Amato, Joseph Anthony & Mosnge, D.  Victims and values: a history and theory of suffering.  Foreword by E. Weber.  Praeger, 1990.  236p., Bibliographic essays p.217-223.  #1150  gift

B105.T54H37 1982   Harrison, Allen F. and Bramson, Robert M.  Styles of thinking: strategies for asking questions, making decisions, and solving problems.  Doubleday: Anchor Press, 1982.  xi, 202p.  InQ inventory p.182-191.  Reading List p.183-184.  Index.  #10657  .55

B105.W6S56 2003   Singing in the fire: stories of women in philosophy.  Edited by Linda Martin Alcoff.  Rowan & Littlefield Publishers, Inc., c2003.  x, 171p., photos, tables. Contains bibliographical notes at ends of chapters.  About the Contributors p.167-171.  #13508

B105.W6W653 1996   Women philosophers.  Edited by Mary Warnock.  Dent & Tattle: Everyman, 1996.  xlvii, 301p.  Chronology of the philosophers’ lives and times, p.viii-xxvii.  #7684  2.50

B113.W613 1956  Windelband, Wilhelm.  History of ancient philosophy.  Translated by Herbert Ernest Cushman.  Dover, 1956.  393p., Bibliography p.385-388.  Index.  #1643  .25

B128.C8K32 2002   Kaizuka, Shigeki, 1904-           Confucius: his life and thought.  Translated by Geoffrey Bownas.  Dover Publications, 2002; 1st published [in English] c1956 [1st published in Japanese].  192p., frontispeice, maps.  Chronologi al Table p.185-187.  Index.  #12585  1.25

B128.C8S56 1973   Smith, D. Howard.  Confucius.  Scribner’s, 1973.  240p.  Bibliography p.219-223.  Principal Events in the Life of Confucius p.226-227.  Table of Dynasties.  p.227-228.  #7367  .25

B128.M33E54 2009   Mengzi, 391-308. Mencius. Translated byIrene Bloom. Edited and with an introduction by Philip J. Ivanhoe. Columbia University Press, c2009. xxiv, 174p. (Translations from the Asian Classics). Contains bibliographical references and footnotes. Introduction Notes p.xx-xxii. Index.  #15726 2.10

B131.P7 1964   Prabhavananda, Swami, 1893-       The spiritual heritage of India.  With the assistance of Frederick Manchester.  Doubleday & Company: Anchor Books, 1964 c1963.  xxii, 449p.  Bibliography p.425-430.  Index.  #11399  5.35

B154.G813 1966   Guttmann, Julius, 1880-1950.  Philosophies of Judaism: the history of Jewish philosophy from Bible times to Franz Rozenzweig.  Introduction by R. J. Zwiwerblowsky.  Translated by David W. Silverman.  Doubleday & Company, Inc.: Anchor Books, 1966 c1964.  x, 546p.  Bibliography p.453-468.  Index.  #12330  3.00

B171.G84 1965  Guthrie, W. K. C.  In the beginning: some Greek views on the origins of life and the early state of man.  Cornwall University press, 1965 c1957.  151p..  Notes p.111-144.  Index.  #1786  .73

B171.R4213   Reale, Giovanni.  A history of ancient philosophy.  Edited and translanted from the Italian by John R. Catlan.  State University of New York Press, 1985-      v.  v.3, The systems of the Hellenistic age. [3rd Italian edition].  First published as Il concetto di filosofia prima e l’unita della metofisica di Aristotle.  #11452  5.35

B171.W353 1958  Warner, Rex.   The Greek philoso­phers.  New American Library: Mentor, 1958.  238p., Bibliographic footnotes.  Index.  #1248  .30

B173.Z52 1950   Zeller, Eduard.  Outlines of the history of Greek philosophy.  13th ed., rev. by Wilhelm Nestle and tr. by L.R. Palmer.  1955 c1950.  349p.  Bibliography p.342-345.  Index.  #7121  4.15

B188.B33 1988   Barnes, Jonathan.  Early Greek philosophy.  Penguin Books, 1988 c1987.  318p., map.  The Sources p.295-301.  Further Readings p.302-303.  Indexes.  #11108  3.60

B220.E5H39 2001   Heraclitus, of Ephesus, fl. 500 B.C.E.  Fragments: the collected wisdom of Heraclitus.  Translated by Brooks Haxton.  With a foreword by James Hillman.  Viking c2001.  xxviii, 99p.  Bibliography p.99.  Greek and English on facing pages.  #11995  4.75

B316.J33 1954  Taylor, Alfred Edward, 1869-1945.   Socrates.  Doubleday: Anchor, 1954 c1952.  189p., bibl. notes.  Index.  Bibliographical Note, 175-177.  #401  1st published in England, 1933.  .75

B316.S75 1989  Stone, I. F.   The trial of Socrates.  Doubleday: Anchor Books, 1989 c1988.  282p..  Notes p.249-267.  #445.  10.55

B316.X2B4 1965   Xenophon, 426-354 B.C.E.  Recollections of Socrates and Socrates’ defense before the jury.  Translated, with an introduction by Anna S. Benjamin.  Bobbs-Merrill: The Library of Liberal Arts, 1965.  xxv, 157p.  Bibliography p. xxiii-xxv.  #7724  2.10

B351.P52 1965   Plato dictionary.  Edited by Morris Stockhammer.  Littlefield, Adams & Co., 1965; 1st published c1957.  xv, 287p.  #11833  10.75

B358.C57 1989   Plato, ca.427-347 B.C.E.  The collected dialogues of Plato, including the letters.  Edited by Edith Hamilton and Huntington Cairns with introduction and prefatory notes.  Princeton University Press, 1987 c1961.  xxv, 1743p.  Index.  Contents: Apology, Crito, Phaedo (Tradennick); Charmides, Laches (Jowett); Lysis (Wright); Euthypho (Cooper); Menexemus, Lesser Hippias (Jowett); Ion (Cooper); Gorgias (Woodhead); Protagoras, Meno (Guthrie); Euthydemus (Rouse); Cratylus (Jowett); Phaedrus (Hackforth); Symposium (Joyce); Republic (Shorey); Theaetetus, Parmenides, Sophist (Cornford); Statesman (Skemp); Philebus (Hackforth); Timaeus (Jowett); Critias, Laws, Epipomis (Taylor); Great Hippias (Jowett); Letters (Post).  #10567  18.75

B358.R5 1956  Plato, ca.427-347 B.C.E.   Great dialogues of Plato.  Tr. by W. H. D. Rouse. Ed. by E. H. Warmington & P. G. Rouse.  New Am. Lib.: Mentor, 1956.  525p., pronouncing index #403  .50

B358.S29 1987   Plato, ca.427-347 B.C.E.  Early Socratic dialogues.  Edited with a general introduction by Trevor J. Saunders.  Penguin Books, c1987.  396p.  Bibliographies p.381-393.  Selective Index of Greek Personal Names.  Contents: Ion (Trevor J. Saunders). Laches (Jane Lane).  Lysis, Charmides (Donald Watt).  Hippias Major, Hippias Minor, Euthydemus (Robin Waterfield).  With some fragments of Aesokines of Splettus (T.J. Saunders).  #10557  6.90 B371.A5H3 1971  Plato, ca.427-347 B.C.E.  Gorgias.  Translated with an introduction by Walter Hamilton.  Penguin Books, 1971; reprint with revisions of 1960.  154p., Select Bibliography p.151.  Index.  #1722  7.65 B380.A5H35 1973  Plato, ca.427-347 B.C.E.  Phaedrus and the seventh and eighth letters.  Translated with introduction by Walter Hamilton.  Penguin Books, 1973.  160p., Selected Bibliography p.159-160.  #1743  9.58

B382.A8G8 1956  Plato, ca.427-347 B.C.E.  Protagoras and Meno.  Translated with an introduction by W.K.C. Guthrie.  Penguin, 1956.  157p.  #1765  .53

B386.A5W37 1987  Plato, ca.427-347 B.C.E.  Theaetetus.  Translated with an esxsay by Robin A. H. Waterfield.  Penguin Books, 1987.  256p.  Bibliography p.245-256.  #5139  9.60

B387.A5L43 1977  Plato, ca.427-347 B.C.E.  Timaeus and Critias.  Translated with an introeuction and an appendix on Atlantis by Desmond Lee.  Penguin Books, 1997; Translation of Timaeus, 1965 reissued with Critias, 1971.  167p.  $5140  9.60 B395.T27 1958  Taylor, Alfred Edward, 1869-1945.   Plato; the man and his work.  Meridian Books, 1958 c1952.  562p., bibl notes, addend., chron., appendix.  #402  Reprinted from 6th ed.  1.95

B401.O7 1966 Ref   Organ, Troy Wilson, 1912-1992. An index to Aristotle in English translation. Gordian Press, Inc., 1966 c1949. vi, 181p. Index terms use the Bekker numbers of the Greek text (1831-1870) employed by the Ross & Smith English edition (1908-1931). The Index does not include Aristotle’s Fragments or the Constitution of Athens.  #15879 18.00

B407.L8 1943   Aristotle, 384-322 B.C.E.  On man in the universe.  Edited with an introduction by Louise Ropes Loomis.  Published for the Classics Club by Walter J. Black, Inc. c1943.  xxxviii, 441p.  Contents: Metaphysics (McMahon); Parts of animals (Ogle); Nicomachean ethics (Welldon); Politics (Jowett); Poetics (Butcher).  #10591  free

B407.R6 1952   Aristotle,384-322 B.C.E. The works of Aristotle. Text and annotations reprinted, translated into English under the editorship of W.D. Ross,  Oxford University Press. Encyclopaedia Britannica, 1952. Published with the editorial advice of the faculties of the University of Chicago. 2v. (viii, 726; vi, 699p.) (The Great Books, v.8-9). #16414-15 2.00

B407.S6 1908   Aristotle, 384-322 B.C.E.   The works of Aristotle.  Translated into English under the editorship of John Alexander Smith and William David Ross.  Oxford University Press, 1908-1952.  Volumes and paging correspond to the Oxford edition of Bekker’s Greek texk, with section numbers, notes.  Indexes.  v.1, 1955 c1928.   CategoriaeDe interpretationeAnalytica prioraAnalytica posterioraTopica and De Sophisticis elenchis.  Index.  #404  10.00

B407.S6 1984   Aristotle, 384-322 B.C.E.  The complete works of Aristotle.  The revised Oxford Translation.  Edited by Jonathan Barnes.  Princeton University press, 1984; a revision of the translation series under the editorship of J.A. Smith and W. D. Ross, 1908-1954.  2v. (xiii, 1250; vii, 1251-2487p.) (Bolligen series, 71:2-3).  Contents:  v.1, 1995.  CategoriesDe interpretationePrior analyticsPosterior analyticsTopicsSophistical refutationsPhysicsOn the heavensOn generation and corruptionMeterologyOn the UniverseOn the soulSense and sensibiliaOn memoryOn sleepOn dreamsOn divination in sleepOn length and shortness of lifeOn youth, old age, lfe and death, and respirationOn breathHistory of animalsProgression of animalsGeneration of animalsOn colorsOn things heardPhysigonomics.  v.2, 1995.  On plants.  On marvellous things heard.  Mechanics.  Problems.  On indivisible lines.  The situations and names of winds.  On Melissus, Henophanes, and Gorgias.  Metaphysiccs.  Nicomachean ethics.  Magna moralia.  Eudemian ethics.  On virtures and vices.  Politics.  Economics.  Rhetoric.  Rhetoric to Alexander.  Poetics.  Constitution of Athens.  Fragments.  #9210, 10320  32.30

B415.A5L287 1986  Aristotle, 384-322 B.C.E.  De anima (on the soul).  Translated with an introduction and notes by Hugh Lawson Tancred.  Penguin Books, 1987.  254p.  Glossary p.117-122; Bibliography p.252-254.  #5013  Gift

B430.A5T4 1976   Aristotle, 384-322 B.C.E.  The ethics of Aristotle: the Nicomachaen ethics.  Translated by J.A.K. Thomson.  Revised with notes and appendices by Hugh Tredennick.  Introduction and bibliography by Jonathan Barnes.  Penguin Books, 1976.  583p.  Bibliography p. 44-52.  Appendices A-J (notes) p.345-366.  Glossary of Greek words p.367-370.  Indexes.  #7732  11.65

B430.E77 1980   Essays on Aristotle’s ethics.  Edited by Amélie Oksenberg Rorty.  University of California Press, c1980.  viii, 438p.  Notes at ends of articles.  Contributors p.437-438.  (Major thinkers series: 2).  #12287  13.40

B430.K73 1991   Kraut, Richard, 1944-    Aristotle on the human good.  Princeton University Press, 1991 c1989.  xi, 379p.  Bibliography p.359-363.  General Index & Index of Passages.  #12289  16.05

B434.A5H6 1960   Aristotle, 384-322 B.C.E.  Metaphysics.  Translated by Richard Hope with an inalytical index of technical terms.  University of Michigan Press: Ann Arbor Paperbacks, 1960 c1952.  xvii, 394p.  Indexes.  #7719  15.92

B434.A5T3 1969   Aristotle, 384-322 B.C.E.  Aristotle on his predecessors.  2nd ed.  Translated with notes and introductuction by A. E. Taylor.  With a new foreword by Herman Shapiro.  Open Court, 1969; 1st published 1906.  xix, 160p.  Selected Bibliography p.xviii-xix.  Appendices A-D p.143-159.  Index of Persons p.160.  #12265  3.80

B434.H4513 1995   Heidegger, Martin, 1889-1976.  Aristotle’s metaphysics Θ  1-3: on the essence and actuality of force.  Translated by Walter Brogan and Peter Wanek.  Indiana University Press, c1995; 1st published as Aristotles Metaphysik Θ  1-3: von Wesen und Wirklichkeit der Kraft, c1981; 2nd ed., c1990.  xvi, 203p.  Glossary of German Words p.197-199.  Glossary of Greek Words p.201-203.  Includes English version of Heidegger’s German translation of the Metaphysics, Book 9.  #12276  6.35

B444.A5B4 1908 pt.1  Aristotle, 384-322 B.C.E.  The parva naturalia: De sensu et sensibili.  Translated by John Isaac Beare, 1908.  Downloaded from Website, 1997.  unp.  #5301

B444.T4613 2005   Thomas, Aquinas, Saint, 1225?-2774. Commentaries on Aristotle’s On sense and what is sensed and On memory and recollection. Translated with introductions and notes by Reom White and Edward M. Macierowski. The Catholic University of America Press, c2005. x, 268p. Notes p.159-165; 235-260. Bibliography p.261-268. #15810 7.55

B469.8.C47 1964   Aristotle.  Protrepticus.  A reconstruction by Anton-Hermann Chroust.  University of Notre Dame Press, c1964.  xxi, 110p.  Bibliographical References p.xvli-xxi.  #12453  8.00

B481.A3 1978   Adler, Mortimer Jerome, 1902-2001. Aristotle for everybody: difficult thought made easy.  Macmillan Publishing Co., Inc., c1978.  xiv, 206p.  Preface p.vii-viii. Introduction p.ix-xiv. Epilogue: For those who have read or who wish to read Aristotle [sources outlined] p.191-206.  #12264r  5.40

B485.J33 1962   Jaeger, Werner.  Aristotle: fundamentals of the history of his development.  Translated with the author’s corrections and additions by Richard Robinson.  2d ed.  Oxford University Press, 1962 c1948; 1st published 1923 as Aristotles, grundlegung einer Geschichte seiner Entwicklung.   475p.  Bibliographical footnes.  Index.  #5894  6.00

B485.L43 1988   Lear, Jonathan.  Aristotle: the desire to understand.  Cambridge University Press, c1988.  xi, 328p.  Select Bibliography p.321-326.  Index.  #12270  6.60

B485.R49 1995   Robinson, Timothy A., 1947-           Aristotle in outline. Hackett Publishing Company, Inc., c1995.  vii, 125p.  Bibliographic Essay p.108-122.  Index.  #12448  3.75

B485.R6 1964   Ross, William David, Sir, 1877-        Aristotle.  5th ed.  Metheun/Barnes & Noble: University Paperbacks, 1964.  [vi], 300p., frontispiece.  Short Bibliography p.291-295.  Aristotle’s Successors and Commentaries p.296.  Index.  #7735  5.30

B485.T27 1955   Taylor, Alfred Edward, 1869-1945.  Aristotle.  rev ed.  Dover, 1955; 1st published 1919.  118p.  Index.  #5536  4.20

B491. L8A76 1987   Anton, John Peter, 1920-       Aristotle’s theory of contrariety.  University Press of America, 1987 c1957.  253p., diagrams.  Bibliography p.242-246.  (The International Library of Psychology, Philosophy and Scientific Method).  Indexes.  #12569  8.55

B505.H454   The Hellenistic philosophers.  [Translated & edited by] A.A. Long and D.N. Sedley.  Cambridge University Press, 1999 c1987.  2v. (xv, 512p.;                              ).  Indexes: Glossary p.489-492.  Sources p.492-500.  Philosophers p.501-508.  Topics p.509-512.  Contents: v.1, Translations of the principal sources, with philosophical commentary.  v.2, Greek and Latin texts with notes and bibliography.  h: 1 #11329  8.50

B505.M48 1945   Marcus Aurelius and his times: the transition from paganism to Christianity. Comprising Marcus Aurius: Meditations; Lucian: Hermotimus, Icaramenippas; Justin Martyr: Dialogue with Trypho, First Apology; Walter Pater: Marius the Epicurean (Selections).  With an introduction by Irwin Edman.  Published for the Classics Club by Walter J. Black, 1945. viii, 306p.  #10593  free

B505.S7 1970   The Stoic and Epicurean philosophers.  The complete extant writings of Epicururs, Epictetus, Lucretius, Marcus Aurelius.  Edited, and with an introduction by Whitney J. Oates.  The Modern Library, 1940.  627p.  Appendix: Subject Indexes and Glossary p.610-627.  #5581  3.15

B517.W33 1972   Wallis, R       T       Neoplatonism. Charles Scribner’s Sons c1972. xii, 212p., map. (Classical Life and Letters). Contains bibliographical footnotes. Abbreviations p.179-181. Citations of Ancient Sources p.183-184. Bibliography p.185-197. Index. #14112 6.65

B528.E7 1961   Essential works of Stoicism.  Edited and with an introduction by Moses Hadas.  Bantam Books, 1961.  206p.  Bibliography p.206.  Contents: Diogenes Laertius, Life of Zeno.  Cleanthes, Hymn to Zeus.  Seneca, On Tranquility.  Epictetus, The Manual.  Marcus Aurelius, To Himself.  #7126  .85

B560.E5H515 1994   Epictetus.  Discourses and Enchiridion.  Based on the translation of Thomas Wentworth Higginson.  With an introduction by Erwin Edman.  Published for the the Classics Club by Walter J. Bloch, 1944.  xv, 352p.  #10539  2.15

B570.E5M37 2005   Epicurus, 341-271 B.C.E.  Letters and sayings of Epicurus.  Translation, introduction, and notes by Odysseus Makridis.  Barnes & Noble Books, c2005’ 1st published 305 B.C.E.  xxviii, 100p.  Index.  Suggested Reading p.99-100.  Text based on Epicurea, edited by Hermann usener; 1st published 1887.   #13513  7.50

B580.F37 1990   Marcus Aurelius Antonius, Emperor of Rome, 121-180. The meditations. Translated by A. S. L. Farquaharson. And a selection of the letters of Marcus and Fronto, translated by R. B. Rutherford. With an introduction and notes by R.B. Rutherford. Oxford University Press, 1990 c1964 & 1989. xxviii, 195. (The World’s Classics). Further Reading p.xxiv-xxv. Explanatory Notes p.145-191. Comparative Style of References to Fronto p.192. Index.  #13085 4.25

B615.E5H3 1968  Seneca, Lucius Anneas, ca. 4 B.C.E.-65.  The Stoic philosophy of…  Essays and letters of Seneca.  Translated and with an introduction by Moses Hadas.  Nosrton, 1968 c1958.  261p.  #7122  4.15

B620.E5 1985   Sextus Empiricus, ca. 200.  Selections from the major writings on scepticism, man & god.  New rev. ed.  Edited with introduction and notes by Philip P. Hail.  Translated from the original Greek by Sanford G. Etheridge.  New foreword and bibliography by Donald R. Morrison.  Haworth Publishing Co.: Avatar Books of Cambridge, c1985; 1st published c1968.  xvi, 238p.  Contains bibliographical footnotes.  Bibliography p.217-222.  Indexes.   #13419  7.60

B655.C62S5 1995   Augustinus Aurelius, Saint, Bishop of Hippo, 354-430.  Against the academicians, The teacher.  Translated with introduction and notes by Peter King.  Hackett Publishing, 1995.  183p.  Appendices p.147-171.  Textual Notes p.172-174.  Biographical Index p.174-178.  Recommended Reading p.178.  Select Bibliography p.179-183.  #7146  $13.85

B655.Z7A95 1999   The Augustinian tradition. Edited by Gareth B. Mathews. University of California Press, c1999. xx, 398p. Note at ends of articles. Includes bibliographical references. (Philosophical Traditions; 8) Select Bibliography of Recent Book on Augustine p. xv. Chronology of Augustine’s Life p. xvii. Contributors p.383-384. Index. #16255 10.55

B655.Z7B854 1999   Burt, Donald X.  Friendship and society: an introduction to Augustine’s practical philosophy.  Wm. B. Eerdman’s Publishing Company, c1999.  xii, 239p.  Bibliography p.228-236.  Index.  #10110  9.65

B659.C2E59 1962   Boethius, c.475-525.  The consolation of philosophy.  Translated with an introduction and notes by Richard Green.  Macmillan: Library of Liberal Arts, 1962.  134p.  Index.  #1937  .15

B667.H84D85 1995   Dzielska, Maria.  Hypatia of Alexandria.  Translated by F. Lyra.  Harvard University Press, 1995.  157p.  Notes p.121-157.  Index.  #5106  $12.55

B689.A4E52004   Philo of Alexandria c20 B.C.E – c50 C.E. Selected writings. Edited by Hans Levy. Dover Publications, Inc., 2004; 1st published as Philo: Selections in Three Jewish Philosophers, 1965. 112p. Contains bibliographical references. Some Remarks on the Arrangement of the Selection and Bibliographical Notes p.107-110. Note on the Editor p.110-112.  #14108 4,30

B693.E53O2 1964   Plotinus, 204/5-270.  The essential Plotinus: representative treatises from the Enneads.  Selected and newsly translated with an introduction and commentary by Elmer O’Brien.  New American Library: A Mentor Book, c1964.  ix, 10-224p.  Soures at ends of selections.  Appendices I. Related Readings [from Pre-Socratics, Plato, Aristotle] p.176-215.  II. A Plotinus Glossary p.216-218.  III. Selected Annotated Bibliography p.218-224.  #12982  3.20

B693.E532E5 1986   Plotinus, 204/5-270.  The six enneads.  Translated by Stephen MacKenna and B.S. Page.  Encyclopedia Britannica, Inc., 1986 c1952.  vi, 360p. (Great Books of the Western World, 17).  #13119  7.50

B721.G48 1938   Gilson, Étienne, 1884-1978.   Reason and revelation in the middle ages.  Charles Scribner’s Sons, 1938.  114p., Bibliographical notes p.103-110.  Index.  #406  1.25

B721.H37 1992   Haren, Michael.  Medieval thought: the western intellectual tradition from antiquity to the thirteenth century.  2nd ed.  University of Toronto Press, c1992; 1st published c1985.  ix, 315p.  Bibliography (First Edition) p.267-290.  Supplementary Bibliography p.291-305.  Index.  #12103  5.35

B721.K66 1962  Knowles, David, 1896-        The evolution of medieval thought.  Random House: Vintage Books, c1962.  vi, 356p.  Suggestions for Further Reading p.341-343.  Index.  #9572  1.05 B721.L4 1958   Leff, Gordon.   Medieval thought: St. Augustine to Ockham.  Penguin Books, 1958.  316p., Select Bibl p.305. 307.  Index.  #407  .75

B721.V513 1959   Vignaux, Paul.  Philosophy in the Middle Ages: an introduction.  Translated from the French by E.C. Hall.  Meridian, 1959; 1st published 1958.  223p., Bibliography p. 215-218.  Index.  #1454  1.07

B734.R79 2003   Rubenstein, Richard E., 1938-      Aristotle’s children: how Christians, Muslims, and Jews rediscovered ancient wisdom and illuminated the dark ages. Harcourt, Inc. c2003. xiv, 368p., drawings. Notes p.299-335. Select Bibliography p.337-350. Acknowledgements p.351-352. Index.  #14192 10.65

B749.Z7T53 1968   Thomas Aquinas, Saint, 1225?-1274.  On the unity of the intellect against the Averroists.  (De Unitate Intellectus Contra Averroistas.)  Translated from the Latin with an intrduction by Beatrice H. Zedler.  Marquette University Press, c1968.  xi, 79p.  Books Used in Notes to the Translation p.77-79.  (Medieval Philosophical Texts in Translation; no.19).  #12463  1.05

B755.H8H58 1958   Husik, Isaac, 1876-1939. A history o mediaeval Jewish philosophy. Meridian Books & The Jewish Publication Society of America, 1958; 1st published c1916, renewed 1940. l, 466p. Contains bibliographical references. Bibliography p.433-441. Notes p.443-452. List of Biblical and Rabbinic Quotations. p.453. Index.  #15794 .25

B765.A24R3 1974   Abelard, Peter, 1079-1142.  The letters of Abelard and Heloise.  Translated with an introduction by Betty Radice.  Penguin, 1974.  309p., maps, Selected Bibliography p.296-297.  Contains Historia calamitatum and Letters of Peter the Venerable.  #5194  8.60

B765.A82E54 2008.   Anselm, Saint, Archbishop of Canterbury, 1033-1109. The major works. Edited with an introduction by Brian Davies and G.R. Evans. Oxford University Press, 2008 c1998. xxviii, 513p. (OxfInord World Classics). Contains bibliographical references. Note on the Text and Translators p.xxiv-xxv. Select Bibliography p.xxvi-xxvii. A Chronology of Anselm’s Life p.xviii. Index. Includes Monologion, Proslogion, Pro Insipiente, De Grammatico, Cur Deus Homo, De Concordia, Philosophical Fragments.  #408r  1.85

B765.A83P73 1979   Anselm, Saint, Archbishop of Canterbury, 1033-1109.  St. Anselm’s Proslgion with a reply on behalf of the fool by Gaunilo and The author’s reply to Gaunilo.  Translated with an introduction and philosophical commentary by M.J. Charlesworth.  University of Notre Dame Press, 1979, c1963.  vii, 196p.  Bibliographical footnotes.  Index.  Latin and English on facing pages.  #10986  .15

B765.D72E58 1987   Duns Scotus, John, ca.1266-1308.  Philosophical writings: a selection.  Translated, with an introduction and notes, by Allan Wolter.  With a foreword by Marilyn McCord Adams.  Hackett Publishing, 1987; reprint of the Nelson edition.  xxxiii, 198p.  Select Bibliography p. xxxi-xxxiii.  Indexes.  Latin and English on facing pages.  Contents: I. Concerning metaphysics.  II. Man’s natural knowledge of God.  III. The existence of God.  IV. The unity of God.  V. Concerning human knowledge.  VI. The spirituality and immortality of the human soul.  #7743  4.25

B765.T51 1993   Thomas, Aquinas, Saint, ca.1225-1274.  Selected philsophical writings.  Selected and translated by Timothy McDermott.  Oxford University press, c1993.  xxxv, 452p.  Select Bibliography p.xxxiv-xxxv.  Index.  #10475  4.25

B765.T52 E474 1960   Thomas, Aquinas, Saint, ca.1225-1274.   The pocket Aquinas.  Edited and a general introduction by Vernon J. Burke.  Washington Square, 1962.  372p.  Recommended readings.  Index.  #499  4.74 B765.T54C6 1959   Copleston, Frederick Charles.  Aquinas.  Penguin Books, 1959 c1955.  263p.  Bibliographical Notes p.256-258.  Index.  #409  .95

B765.T54G47 1963   Gilson, Étienne, 1884-1978.  Elements of Christian philosophy.  New American Library: Mentor-Omega, 1963 c1960.  380p.  Bibliography p.362-367.  Indexes.  #949  .25

B775.C32 1963  Renaissance philosophy of man.  Selections in translation.  Edited by Ernst Cassier, Paul Oskar Kristeller, John Herman Randall.  University of Chicago Press, 1963 c1948.  vi, 404p.  Selective Bibliography p.397-400.  Index.  Contents: Francesco Petrarca includes: On his own ignorance and that of many others (Hans Nachod).  Lorenzo Valla , Dialogue on free will (Charles Edward Trinkaus).  Marsilio Ficino , Five questions concerning the mind (Josephine L. Burroughs).  Giovanni Pico Della Mirandola, Oration on the dignity of man  (Elizabeth Livermore Forbes).  Pietro Pomponazzi, On the immortality of the soul  (William Henry Hay).  Juan Luis Vives, A fable about man  (Nancy Lenkeith).  #410  1.95

B778.C29 1993   Carroll, John, 1994-            Humanism: the wreck of western culture.  HarperCollins: Fontana Press, 1993.  xi, 240p., illus.  The Works p.233.  Index.  #9678  6.40

B778.H3 1960   Hadas, Moses, 1900-1966. Humanism: the Greek ideal and its survival. Harper & Brothers Publishrs, c1960. xviii, 132p. (World Perspectives, 24).  #15715 .30

B785.E62E5 1996   Erasmus, Desiderius, c1466-1536.  Erasmus on women.  University of Toronto Press, c1996.  vi, 251p.  Notes at ends of selections.  Chronology of Erasmus’ Life p.243-244.  Further Reading p.245.  Index.  #12232  8.55

B785.P53D443 1986   Pico della Mirandola, Giovanni, 1463-1494.  On the dignity of man; translated by Charles Glenn Wallis.  On being and the one; translated by Paul J. W. Willer.  Heptaplus; translated by Douglas Carmichael.  With an introduction by Paul J. W. Miller.  Macmillan: The Library of Liberal Arts, c1985.  174p.  #8097  4.25

B790.E7 1959  Essays in philosophy from David Hume to Bertrand Russell.  Edited and with notes by Houston Peterson with James Bayley.  Pocket Library, 1959.  509p.  For Further Reading p.505-507.  #1455  .50

B791.B85 1975  Bronowski, Jacob & Mazlish, Bruce.  Western intellectual tradition from Leonardo to Hegel.  Harper & Row: Harper Torchbooks, 1960.  522p.  Bibliographical footnotes.  Indexes.  #1456  2.68

B791.P7 1964   Prosch, Harry, 1917-        The genesis of twentieth century philosophy: the evolution of thought from Copernicus to the present.  Thomas Y. Crowell Company, c1964.  418p.  Bibliography p.399-407.  Index.  #11682  1.05

B791.R8 1967   Royce, Josiah, 1855-1916.  The spirit of modern philosophy: an essay in the form of lectures.  W.W. Norton: the Norton Library, 1967 c1892.  xvii, 519p.  Bibliographical footnotes.  Index.  #9628  3.20

B791.S38 1996   Scruton, Roger.  Modern philosophy: an introduction and survey.  Penguin Books, 1996 c1994.  x,611p.  Study Guide p. 499-596.  Index.  #7723  3.75

B799.D54 1989   Dilworth, David A., 1934-        Philosophy in world perspective: a cooperative hermeneutic of the major theories.  Yale University Press, 1989.  232p.  Notes p.175-225.  Index.  #5525  .50

B801.N33 2008   Nadler, Steven M., 1958-       The best of all possible worlds: a story of philosophers, God, and evil. Farrar, Straus and Giroux, c2008. xvi 300p., front. Notes p.255-279. Bibliography p.281-285. Acknowledgements p.287-288. Index.  #14459 3.20

B802.B4 1961   Becker, Carl L.   The heavenly city of the eighteenth-century philosophers.  Yale University Press, 1961 c1932.  168p., bibl. notes.  #411  1.25

B802.O985 2006 Ref   Outram, Dorinda. Panorama of the Enlightenment. Thames & Hudson, Ltd. and Getty Publications c2006. 320p. Illus. (part color). Timeline p.304. Men and Women p.305-312. Enlightenment Places p.313-314. Suggestions for Further Reading p.315-316. Index. Sources of Illustrations p.317. Acknowledglements p.320.  #13972 2.15

B802.W48 2004 Ref   Wilson, Ellen Judy. Encyclopedia of the Englightenment; rev. ed. Peter Hanns Reill, Consulting Editor. Facts on File, Inc. c2004; 1st published 1996. xvii, 670p. Illus. Contains bibliographical references. List of Illustrations p.iv-vi. Chronology p.xiv-xviii. Selected Bibliography p. 643-646. Index. #13392 11.35

B804.A1 P4   Philosophy today.  no.1-3.  Edited by Jerry H. Gill.  The Macmillan Company, c1968-1970.  3v. (x, 278; p.)  have: no.l  #13356  3.20

B804.B358 1979   Barrett, William.  The illusion of technique: a search for meaning in a technological civilization.  Doubleday: Anchor Books, 1979 c1978.  xxii, 392p.  Index.  #10459  7.15

B804.K6 1960   Koch, Adrienne.  Philosophy for a time of crisis: an interpretation with key writings by fifteen great modern thinkers.  Dutton, 1960 c1959.  382p.  Notes at ends of chapters.  Index.  #5492  1.05

B804.K63 1965   Kohl, Herbert R.  The age of complexity.  New American Library: A Mentor Book, c1965.  x, 11-287p.  Bibliography p.281-287.   #13355  2.65

B808.9.F57 1992   Flanagan, Owen J., 1949-      Consciousness reconsidered. The MIT Press: A Bradford Book, c1992. xviii, 234p., diagrams. References p.223-227. Index.  #14130 10.75

B809.6.L44 1992   Lehman, David.   Signs of the times: deconstruction and the fall of Paul De Marr.  Poseidon Press, 1992.  320p.  Selected Bibliography p.301-304.  Index.  #1026  3.20

B816.H64 1980   Holland, R(oy) F(raser) 1923-2013. Against empiricism: on education, epistemology and value. Barnes & Noble Books, c1980. viii, 248p. Acknowledglements p. vii. Index. #16179 32.10

B816.N6 1973   Novack, George.  Empiricism and its evolution: a Marxist view.  Pathfinder Press, 1973 c1971; 1st published 1959.  164p.  Selected Secondary Sources in English for Reading and Reference p.160-161.  Index.  #10420  2.70

B818.R32 1990   Rachels, James, 1941-        Created from animals: the moral implications of Darwinism.  Oxford University Press, c1990.   [iii], 245p.  Bibliography p.235-241.  Index.  #11626  5.20

B819.B3 1962   Barrett, William.   Irrational man; a study in existential philosophy.  Doubleday & Company: Doubleday Anchor Books, 1962 c1958. [vi],314p. Contains bibliographical references. Index.  #412 1.45

B819.B58 1959   Blackman. H        J       Six existentialist thinkers.  Harper torchbooks, 1959 c1952.  173p.  Bibliographical Notes p.169-170.  Index.  Contents: Kierkegaard, Nietzsche, Jaspers, Marcel, Heidegger, Sartre.  #5879  .50 B819.K3 1959   Existentialism from Dostoevsky to Sartre.  Edited with an introd., prefaces, and new translation.  Meridian Books, 1959 c1956.  319p., Sources and acknowledgements.  #413.  1.45

B819.M314 1960   Maritain, Jacques, 1882-1973.  Existence and the existent.  English version by Lewsis Galantiere and Gerald B. Phelan.  Doubleday & Company: Image Books, 1960 c1948; 1st published as Court traite de l’existence et de l’existant.  153p.  Bibliographical flootnotes.  #11679  4.30

B819.S272 1966   Sartre, Jean-Paul, 1905-1980.   Being and nothingness, an essay on phenomenological ontlology.  Translated, with an introduction by Hazel E. Barnes.  Washington Square, 1966 c1953.  783p..  Index #414   .90

B819.S3542 1968   Sartre, Jean-Paul, 1905-1980.  Search for a method.  Translated from the French with an introduction by Hazel F. Barnes.  Random House: Vintage, 1968 c1963; 1st published as Queste de la Methode, 1960.  181p.  #1787  .73

B821.E35 1978   Ehrenfeld, David. The arrogance of humanism. Oxford University Press, c1981; 1st published c1978. xviii, 286p. References p.271-279. Index. #16130 gift

B821.F72 1971   Fromm, Erich, 1900-1980.  The revolution of hope: toward a humanized technology.  xxii, 162p.  (World Perspective Series, 38).  What This Series Means p.ix-xvi. #12242r  3.45

B821.L33 1990   Lamont, corliss, 1902-1995. The philosophy of humanism. 7th ed., rev. & enl. The Continuum Publishing Company, c1990; 1st published c1949. xxx, 326p. Contains footnotes. Reference Notes p.301-308. Selected Bibliography p.309-311.  #15069 1.10

B821.M3422 1973   Maritain, Jacques, 1882-1973.  Integral humanism: temporal and spiritual problems of a new Christendom.  Translated by Joseph W. Evans.  University of Notre Dame Press, 1973 c1968; 1st published 1936 as Humanisme intègral.  308p.  Bibliographical footnotes.  #5912  1.00

B821.S5 1966   Socialist humanism: an international symposium.   Edited by Erich Fromm.  Doubleday: Anchor Books, 1966 c1965.  461p., bibliographical footnotes.  #1080.  .27

B823.3.B313 1976   Barth, Hans.  Truth and ideology.  Translated by Frederic Lilge.  Foreword by Reinhard Bendix.  University of California Press, 1976.  201p., bibliographical footnotes.  Index.  #1644  .25

B824.M65 2004   Morris, Colin, 1928-      The discovery of the individual, 1050-1200. University of Toronto Press, 2004 c1987; 1st published 1972. xvi, 188p. (Medieval Academy Reprints for Teaching; 19) Contains footnotes with bibliographical references. List of Illustrations p.vii. Acknowledgements p.viii. Chronology Tablep.xiii-xvi. References p.169-177. Suggestions for Further Reading p.179-181. Index. #16229 2.40

B828.3.L39 1988   Levin, David Michael, 1939-     The opening of vision: nihilism and the postmodern situation.  Routledge, 1988.  560p.  Bibliography p.537-550.  Index.  #5317  .15

B831.2.T77 1995   Truth about  truth: de-confusing and re-constructing the post-modern world.  Edited by Walter Truett Anderson.  Putnams: Jeremey P. Tarcher/Putnam Book, 1995.  260p.  Notes p.245-252.  #1784  5.33

B832.J2 1960   James, William, 1842-1910.  Pragmatism and four essays from The Meaning of truth.  Meridian Books, 1960 c1955.  269p., bibl. notes p.257-264.  Index.  Pragmatism, 1907; Meaning of truth, 1909.  #1106  2.10

B832.P6 1966   Pragmatic philosophy: an anthology.  Edited by Amelie O. Rorty.  Doubleday: Anchor Books, 1966.  548p.  Bibliography p. 523-548.  Contents: Charles Sanders Pierce.  William James.  John Dewey.  The Early Critics.  Recent Reactions and Adaptations.  #5913  1.00

B833.N37 1994   Nathanson, Stephen, 1943-      The ideal of rationality: a defense within reason. Rev. ed. Open Court c1994; 1st published 1985. xvi, 256p. Acknowledgements p.xiv-xv. 256p. Afterword: I. Rationality Revisited p.197-201. II. An Interview with the Author p.203-213. III. Rationality: Doubts and Theories p.215-228. IV. Final Thoughts p.229-230. Notes p.231-246. Bibliography p.247-252. #13943 4.25

B840.B8 1955   Burke, Kenneth.  A rhetoric of motives.  George Braziller, 1955 c1950.  xi, 340p..  Index.  #7467  free

B840.K6 1956   Krutch, Joseph Wood.   The modern temper: a study and a confession.  Harcourt, Brace & World: A Harvest Book, 1956; 1st published 1929.  169p.  #906    .64

B840.K68 1954   Krutch, Joseph Wood.   The measure of man: on freedom, human values, survival and the modern temper.  Grosset&Dunlap: Grosset’s Universal Library, 1954.  261p.  #907  .80

B840.T37 1970   Taylor, Daniel M.  Explanation and meaning: an introduction to philosophy.  Cambrdige at the University press, c1970.  xi, 202p., diagrams.  Further Reading p.195-199.  Index.  #10750

B841.4.S775 1972   The structuralists from Marx to Lévi-Strauss.  Edited by Richard T. & Fernande M. DeGeorge.  Doubleday & Company: Anchor Book, c1972.  xxix, 330p., drawings.  Contains bibliographical references.  Index.  #12194  .95

B851.R662012   Romano, Carlin. America the Philosophical. Alfred A. Knopf, c2012. [x], 675p. illus.  #16466  7.50

B851.S4 1946   Schneider, Herbert Wallace, 1892-       A history of American philosophy.  Columbia University Press, 1946.  xiv, 646p.  Guide to Literature at ends of chapters.  Index.  #7772  5.30

B851.W48 1964   Whittemore, Robert C.  Makers of the American mind: three centuries of American thought and thinkers.  William Morrow, 1964.  497p.  References at ends of chapters.  Index.  #1527  .25

B858.B4 1965   Bentley, John Edward, 1887-      An outline of American philosophy.  Littlefield, Adams & Co: Littlefield Quality Paperbacks, 1965 c1963.  xii, 208p.  Bibliography p.viii and Bibliographical footnotes.  Index.  #9095  1.65

B878.B6 1993   Boorstin, Daniel Joseph, 1914-      The lost world of Thomas Jefferson: with a new preface.  University of Chicago Press, 1993.  306p.  Notes p.254-294.  Index.  #5291  16.00

B893.R4 1964   Reck, Andrew J., 1927-   Recent American philosophy: studies of ten representative thinkers.  Random House: Pantheon Books, c1964; articles previousl published 1960-1963.  xxiii, 343p.  References at ends of chapters.  Index.  Contents: R.B. Perry.  W.E. Hooking.  G.H. Mead.  J.E. Bloodin.  W.M. Urban.  D.H. Parker.  R.W. Sellars.  A.O. Lovejoy.  E. Jordan.  E.S. Brightman.  #10106  1.10

B901.M3 1970   Madden, Edward H.  Civil disobedience and moral law in nineteenth-century American philosophy.  University of Washington Press, 1970 c1968.  vii, 214p.  Selected Bibliography p.203-210.  Index.  #11031  1.05

B905.K67 1975   Koster, Donald Nelson, 1910-     Transcendentalism in America.  Twayne Publishers, 1975.  126p.  Chronology p.v-vi.  Selected Bibliography p.111-119.  Index.  #1963  .50

B945.A2864A35 1977   Adler, Mortimer Jerome, 1902-        Philosopher at large: an intellectual biography.  Macmillan, 1977.  349p., phtos.  Bibliography of … p.330-337.  Index.  #5318  .15

B945.B773P4 1977   Burke, Kenneth.  Permanence and change: an anatomy of purpose.  2nd. ed.  With an introduction by Hugh Dalziel Duncan.  Bobbs-Merrill Educational Publishing/The Library of Liberal Arts, 1977 c1965; 1st published 1954.  lix, 294p.  Bibliographical footnotes.  Appendix: On Human Behavior p.274-294.  #12616  4.25

B945.C271 1982   Cavell, Stanlley Louis, 1926-      Must we mean what we say? a book of essays. Cambridge University Press c1976; 1st published c1969. xxx, 365p. Contains bibliographical footnotes. Acknowledgements p. ix-xiv. Thematic Index p.357-360. Index of Names p.363-365. Index of Names p.363-365. #14154 .80

B945.D43R4 1950   Dewey, John, 1859-1952.  Reconstruction in philosophy.  With a new introduction by the author.  Editor’s note by Eduard C. Lindeman.  New American Library: Mentor, 1951 c1950; 1st published 1920.  168p..  Index.  #7131  .80

B945.D44B43 1966   Bernstein, Richard J.  John Dewey.  Washington Square Press, 1966.  ix, 1213p.  Bibliographical Note p.187-190.  Index.  #7366  .25

B945.D44P47 1987   Peterson, Forrest H.  John Dewey’s Reconstruction in philosophy.  Philosophical Library, c1987.  96p.  Bibliography p.96.  #11181  1.05 B945.E34A3 1956   Edman, Irwin, 1896-         Philosopher’s holiday.  The Viking Press: Compass Books, 1956 c1938.  x, 270p.  #11780  1.60

B945.H683Q47 1991  Hook, Sidney, 1902-1989.  The quest for being.  Prometheus Books, 1991; 1st published 1961.  254p.  Notes p.244-248.  Index.  (Great books in philosophy).  #9532  4.20

B945.J2E7 1970   James, William, 1842-1910.  Essays on faith and morals.  Selected by Ralph Barton Perry.  World Publishing: Meridian Books, 1970 c1962.  341p.  Index.  #5319  .25

B945.J21   James, William, 1842-1910.  Writings.  The Library of American, c1987.  Bruce Kuklick wrote the notes and selected the contents.  2v. ( ;vii, 1379p.)  Chronology, v.2: p.1321-1347.  Notes, v.2: p.1348-1379.  Indexes at the end of each title.  Contents: v.2. The varieties of religious experience.  Pragmatism.  A Pluralistic Universe.  The meaning of truth.  Some Problems of Philosophy.  Essays.  #1106r  26.45

B945J24W475 1996   William James remembered.  Edited by Linda Simon.  University of Nebraska Press, c1996.  Bibliographical notes at ends of selections.  Chronology p.xxv-xxvii.  Sources p.xxix-xxx.  Acknowledgements p.xxxi-xxxiii.  Index.  Pages are bound on opposite side, resulting in reverse order.  #13409  2.10

B945.L273P4 2009   Langer, Susanne Katherina (Knauth) 1895-       Philosophical sketches. Barnes & Noble, 2009 1962. xii, 179p. (Barnes & Noble Rediscovers). Contains biblographical references. Index. Contents: The Process of Feeling. Speculations on the Origins of Speech and its Communication Function. On a New Definition of “Symbol.” Emotion and Abstraction. The Cultural Importance of Art. Scientific Civilization and Cultural Association. Man and Animal: the City and the Hive. The Ultimate Unit. The Glowing Center of Knowledge. #14095 10.75

B945.L583E7 1960   Lovejoy, Arthur Oncken, 1873-1962.  Essays in the history of ideas.  G. P. Putnam’s Sons: Capricorn Books, 1960 c1948.  xv, 359p.  Bibliographical footnotes.  Bibliography of Published Writings of Arthur O. Lovejoy, 1898-1951, p.339-353.  Index.  #11543  .25

B945.M2982E5 1969   Marcuse, Herbert, 1898-1979.  Negations: essays in critical theory; with translations from the German by Jeremy J. Shapiro.  Beacon Press, 1969 c1968.  xx, 290p.  Notes p.269-284.  Index.  #100814  6.40

B945.M2983E8 1969   Marcuse, Herbert, 1898-1979.  An essay on liberation.  Beacon Press, 1969. 91p.  #9097  2.15

B945.M4761.F45 2005   Miller, William John, 1895-1978. The task of criticism: essays on philosophy, history, and community. Edited with an introduction to Miller’s philosophy by Joseph P. Fell et. al. W. W. Norton & Company c2005. 366p., front. Contains bibliographical notes. Miller Bibliography p.343-36. About the Editors p.347. On the Cover p.349. Index.  #14458 6.40

B945.N6A3 1963   Northrop, Filmer Stuart Cuckow, 1893-      Man, nature and God: a quest for life’s meaning.  Pocket Books: Giant Cardinal Edition, 1963 c1962.  xxi, 262p.  Notes p.259-262.  #10095  .70

P945.P44S47 1994   Sheriff, John K. Charles Peirce’s Guess at the riddle: grounds of human significance. Foreword by Nathan Houser. Indiana University Press c1994. xxvi, 100p. Acknowledgements p.xxiii. Notes p.91-95. Index.  ##13673 .55

B945.R231 1990   Rand, Ayn, 1905-1982.   The voice of reason: essays in objectivist thought.  Ed. by Leondard Peikoff.  Penguin: Meridian, 1990 c1989.  353p., chpt. notes.  #478  9.48

B945.R233A56 2005   Rand, Ayn, 1905-1982. Ayn Rand answers: the best of her Q&A. [Centennial Edition]. Edited by Robert Mayhew. New American Library c2005. xii, 241p. Acknowledgements p.iv. Abbreviations xi-xiii. Index.  #13841 12.75

B945.R233A96 1986   Rand, Ayn, 1905-1982. The Ayn Rand lexicon: objectivism from A to Z. Edited by Harry Binswanger with an introduction by Leonard Peikoff. New American Library: NAL Books c1986. xxiv, 535p. Acknowlegement p.iv. Conceptual Index p.xiii-xix. Abbreviations p.xxi.  8JA87 21.15

BR945.R234F45 1999   Feminist interpretations of Ayn Rand.  Edited by Mimi Reisel Gladstein and Chris Matthew Sciabarra.  Pennsylvania State University press, c1999.  xiv, 413p.  (Re-Reading the Canon).  Acknowledgements p.xiii-xiv.  Selected Bibliography p.391-396.  Contributions p.397-402.  Index.  #13095  1.10

BR945.R234G67 2000   Gatthelf, Allan, 1942-            On Ayn Rand.  Thomson Learning: Wadsworth, c2000.  100p.  Bibliography p.98-100.  #10414  5.35

B945.R234O5 1977   O’Neill, William F.  With charity toward none: an analysis of Ayn Rand’s philosophy.  Littlefield, Adams & Co., 1977 c1971.  [iii] 233p.  Footnotes at ends of chapters.  #10110  3.20

B945.R234P44 1993  Peikoff, Leonard.  Objectivism: the philsophy of Ayn Rand.  Meridian, 1993 c1991.  493p.  References p.460-478.  Index.  #5548  18.15

B945.R234W34 1999   Walker, Jeff, 1952-      The Ayn Rand cult. Open Court Publishing Company c1999. xvii, 396p. Chronology of the Objectivist Movement p.xiii-xvii. Notes p.347-349. Sources p.351-363. Select Bibliography p.365-382. Index.  #14152 7.50

B945.S21 1936   Santayana, George, 1863-1952.  The philosophy of Santayana.  Edited, with an introductory essay, by Irwin Edman.  Random House: The Modern Library, 1942, c1936.  lvi, 593p.  Bibliographical footnotes.  #10082  1.05

B945.S21C3 1964   Santayana, George, 1863-1952.  The wisdom of George Santayana [Atoms of thought].  Selected and edited by Ira D. Cardiff.  The Citadel Press, 1964.  xx, 325p.  Index.  #9563  4.20

B945.S21C59 1968   Santayana, George, 1863-1952.  The birth of reason & other essays.  Edited by Daniel Cory.  Columbia University Press, c1968.  xxxii, 186p.  Notes to Introduction p.185-186.  #11684  7.50

B945.S21L3 1967   Animal faith and spiritual life: previously unpublished and uncollected writings by George Santayana with critical essays on his thought.  Edited by John Lachs.  Appleton-Century-Crofts, c1967.  ix, 470p.,  frontispiece.  Bibliographical footnotes.  Index.  #10548  8.50

B945.S21L33 1969   Santayana, George, 1863-1952.  Physical order and moral liberty: previously unpublished essays…  Edited by John and Shireley Lachs.  Vanderbilt University Press, 1969.  xiv, 322p., frontispiece, bibliographical footnotes.  Index.  #9479  16.05

B945.S21Ss43 2009   Santayana, George, 1865-1952. The genteel tradition in American philosophy and Character and opinion in the United States. Edited and with an introduction by James Seaton. With essays by Wilfred M. McClay Yale University Press, c2009. xxxviii, 200p. (Rethinking the Western Tradition).  Contains bibliographical notes. Notes p.xxxiv-xxxviii. Index.  #14454 5.40

B945.S23D5 1948   Santayana, George, 1863-1952.  Dialogues in limbo, with three new dialogues.  Charles Scribner’s Sons, 1948; 1st published 1946.  [vi], 248p.  #9030  5.35

B945.S23L7 1998   Santayana, George, 1863-1952.  The life of reason.  Prometheus Books, 1998.  xii, 505p.  Index.  Contents: I, Reason in common sense.  II, Reason in society.  III, Reason in religion.  IV, Reason in art.  V, Reason in science.  #9589  10.60

B945.S23S3 1955   Santayana, George, 1863-1952.  Skepticism and animal faith: introduction to a system of philosophy.  Dover Publications, 1955; 1st published 1923.  xii, 314p..  Index.  #8093  10.95

B945.S23W7 1957   Santayana, George, 1863-1952.  Winds of doctrine, and Platonism and the spiritual life.  Harper & Brothers Publishers: Harper Torchbooks, 1957.  [viii], 312p.   #13622  3.15

B945.S24A3 1944   Santayana, George, 1863-1952.  Persons and places: the background of my life.  Charles Scribner’s Sons, 1944.  [iv], 262p..  Index.  #9006  4.75

B945.S24A3 v.2 1945   Santayana, George, 1863-1952.  Persons and places: v.2, The middle span.  Charles Scribner’s Sons, c1945.  [iii], 187p., frontispiece port.  #10038  5.45

B945.S24A3 v.3 1953   Santayana, George, 1863-1952.  Persons and places: v.3, My host the world.  Charles Cribners Sons, c1953.  v, 149p., frontispiece port.  #10554  3.75

B945.S24B78 1960   Butler, Richard.  The life and world of George Santayana.  Henry Regnery Company: A Gateway Edition, 1960.  xii, 205p.  #9211  2.65

B945.S24H6 1961   Howgate, George Washburne, 1903-George Santayana.  A.S. Barnes & Company: A Perpetua Book, 1961 c1938.  ix, 363p.  Appendix: Verse Forms Used by Santayana p.327-340.  Santayana and the Tradition of Platonic Love p.340-347.  Bibliography p.349-352.  Index.  #10336  7.00

B945.S24M38 1987   McCarmide, John, 1918-           George Santayana: a biography.  Alfred A. Knopf, 1987.  xv, 612p., photos.  Appendices p.511-519.  Notes p.521-579.  Selected Bibliography p.581-584.  Index.  #9369  10.70

B945.S24P44 1951   The philosophy of George Santayana.  2nd ed.  Edited by Paul Arthur Schilpp.  Published under the sponsorship of Southern Illionois University at Carbondale, Open Court, c1951; 1st published c1940.  xvii, 698p.  Writings of … to 1940 p.611-668.  Index.  (The Library of Living Philosophers, v.II).  #10747  5.85

B945.S24S56 2000   Singer, Irving.  George Santayana, literary philosopher.  Yale University Press, c2000.  xvi, 217p.  Notes p.201-212.  Index.  #12922

B1131.W5 1953   Willey, Basil, 1897-      Seventeenth century background: studies in the thought of the age in relation to poetry and religions.  Anchor Books, 1953.  316p., Footnotes at ends of chapters.  Index.  #1283  .54

B1153.E5F3   Bacon, Francis, Sir, 1561-1626.   The complete essays of… including The new Atlantis and Novum organum.  Washington Square, 1963.  307p., notes, bibl.  #17  .60

B1190.A3 1971   Bacon, Francis, Sir, 1561-1626.   The advancement of learning. Novum organum. New Atlantis. Encyclopaedia Britannica, 1971 c1952. x, 214p. (Great Books of the Western World, v.30). Biographical Note p.v-vi.  #14072 7.95

B1197.B6 1963   Bowen, Catherine Drinker.  Francis Bacon: the temper of a man.  With illustrations.  Little, Brown and Company: An Atlantic Monthly Press Book, c1963.  viii, 245p., front. port., illus.  Index.  #12326  6.00 B1197.Z34 1999   Zagorin, Perez.  Francis Bacon.  Princeton University Press, 1999 c1998.  xvi, 286p.  References and Abbreviations p.xv-xvi.  Notes p.229-280.  Index.  #12956  3.25

B1198.H46 2002   Henry, John. Knowledge is power: how magic, the government and an apocalyptic vision inspired Francis Bacon to create modern science. Icon Books, c2002. viii, 177p. Acknowledgements p.vii-viii. Glossary p.166-173. Further Reading p.174-175. Notes p.176.  #13950 5.30

B1292.W66 1974   Locke, John, 1632-1704.  Essay concerning human understanding: abridged and edited with an introduction by A.D. Woozley.  New American Library: Meridian, 1974 c1964.  475p.  Bibliography p.463-464; Chronological Table p.465.  Index.  #5014  gift

B1297.C29 1999   The Cambridge companion to Locke. Edited by Vere Chappell. Cambridge University Press, 1999 c1994. xii, 329p. Contains bibliographical references and notes at ends of articles. List of Contributors p.vii-viii. Note on Citations p.ix-x. bibliography p.290-315. Index of Names and Subjects p.316-323. Index of Passages Cited p.324-329.  #15816 2.15

B1297.d86 1984   Dunn, John, 1940-      Locke. Oxford University Press: Oxford Paperbacks c1984. xii, 97p. (Past Masters). Acknowledgements p.x. Note on Abbreviations p.xi-xii. Note on Sources p.90. Further Readings p.91-94. Index.  #14177 1.05

B1301.S8   Stephen, Leslie, Sir, 1832-1904.  History of English thought in the eighteenth century.  3d ed.  With a preface by Crane Brinton.  Harcourt, Brace and World, c1962; first published 1902.  2v. (                ).  Bibliographies at ends of chapters.  Suggestions for Further Reading  v.1, p.395-396.  v.1 #8098  3.20

B1303  1969   Berkeley, George, 1685-1753.  Berkeley’s philosophical writings.  Ed. w\introd. by David M. Armstrong.  Collier Books, 1969 c1965.  384p..  Index.  Contents: Principles of knowledgeThree dialogues between Hylas and PhilonusPhilosophical correspondenceDe MotuTowards a theory of vision.  #1094   Exchange.

B1325 1954   Berkeley, George, 1685-1753.   Three dialogues between Hylas and Philonous.  The Liberal Arts Press, 1954.  113p., chron., bibl.  #21  .80

B1348.W37 1953   Warnock, Geoffrey James, 1923-                 Berkeley.  Penguin Books, c1953.  252p.  Index.   #13489  .50

B1383.A35 P37 1965   Priestley, Joseph, 1733-1805.  Writings on philosophy, science, and politics by Joseph Priestley.  Edited, with an introduction by John A. Passmore.  The Macmillan Company: Collier Books, c1965.  352p.  (Collier Classics in the History of Thought).  Bibliographical footnotes.  Bibliography p.341-343.  Index.  Contains selections from The Doctrine of Philosophical Necessity (1777), Disquitions Relating to Matter and Spirit (1777), and other sources.  Contents: Philosopher.  Scientist.  Unitarian.  Political Theorist.  Social Theorist.  Educator.  Historian.   #13356  2.65

B1475 1985   Hume, David, 1711-1776.  Essays: moral, political and literary.  Edited and with a foreword, notes and glossary by Eugene F. Miller.  With an apparatus of variant readings from the 1889 edition of T.H. Green and T.H. Grove.  Rev. ed.  Liberty Classics, 1985.  Based on the 1777 edition orginally published as v.1 of Essays and treatises on several subjects.  xlix, 683p.  Bibliographical footones.  Glossary p.648-651.  Index.  #9533  5.75

B1480 1993   Hume, David, 1711-1776.  An enquiry concerning human understanding; A letter from a gentleman to his friend in Edinburgh; An abstract of a treatise of human nature.  Edited with introduction by Eric Steinberg; 2nd ed.  Hackett Publishing, 1998 c1993.  xviii, 142p.  Bibliographical footnotes.  Index.  #9439  6.35

B1485 1985   Hume, David, 1711-1776.  A treatise of human nature.  Edited with an introduction by Ernest C. Mossner.  Penguin Books, 1985 c1969; 1st published 1739 & 1740.  678p.  #5258  9.55

B1493.D52 1993  Hume, David, 1711-1776.  Principal writings on religion including Dialogues concerning natural religion and The natural history of religion.  Edited with an introduction by J.C.A. Gaskin.  Oxford University press, 1993.  218p.  Explantory Notes p.197-215.  Descriptive Index of Classical Names p.216-218.  #1907  8.45

B1498.N66 2007   Noonan, Harold W.   Hume. Oneworld Publications, c2007. viii, 215p. (Oneworld Thinkers). Bibliography p.203-207. Index. On cover: A wise man proportions his belief to the evidence.  #15728 1.05

B1545.A35 1982   Smith, Adam, 1723-1790.  Essays on philosophical subjects.  Edited by W. P. D. Wightman and J.C. Bryce.  With Dugdale Stewart’s Account of Adam Smith.  Edited by I.S. Ross.  Liberty Classics, 1982 c1980.  ix, 358p., bibliographical footnotes.  Index.  (The Glasgow edition of the works and correspondence of Adam Smith; 3).  #9471  8.00

B1571.H33 1972   Halévy, Elie.  The growth of philosphic radicalism.  Reprinted and corrected edition.  Translated by Mary Morris.  With a preface by John Plemenatz.  Faber and Faber, c1972; 1st published 1928.  3v. in 1 (xxix, 554p.)  Bibliography by C.W. Everett p.522-546.  Index.  Contents:  Part I, The yuth of Bentham, 1776-1789.  Part II, The evolution of the untilitarian doctrine from 1789 to 1815.  Part III, Philosphic radicalism.  #9629  4.25

B1602.A47 1968   Mill, John Stuart, 1806-1873.   Selected writings of ….  Edited, with an introduction by Maurice Cowling.  New American Library: Mentor, 1968.  432p.  Further Reading p.431.  Mill’s Main Writings p.432.  #5357  1.10

B1606.A2 R5 1989   Mill, John Stuart, 1806-1873.  Autobiogra­phy.  Ed. with an introd. by John M. Robson.  Penguin Books, 1989.  234p., notes.  Index.  #465  2.84

B1615.P3 1975   Passmore, John Arthur.  A hundred years of philosophy.  2d ed.  Penguin Books, 1975 c1966.  640p.  Further Reading p.616-618.  Indexes.  #8679  2.50

B1626.D53 1958   Dixon, William Macneille Dixon, 1866-1945.  The human situation: the Giffortd Lectures delivered in the University of Glasgow, 1935-1937.  Penguin Books, 1958 c1937.  433p.  Bibliographical footnotes.  Index.  #10031  2.40

B1647.M186A3 1999   Magee, Bryan.  Confessions of a philosopher: a personal journey through Western philosophy from Plato to Popper.  The Modern Library, 1999 c1997.  x, 480p..  Index.  #9183  7.45

B1647.M73P38 1962   Moore, George Edward, 1873-1958.  Philosophical papers.  Collier Books, 1962 c1959.  318p..  Index of Names.  #1249  .30

B1647.M73P74 1978   Moore, George Edward, 1873-1958. Principia ethica. Cambridge University Press, 1978; 1st published 1903. xxviii, 232p. Index. #16366 2.95

B1649.R91 1974   Russell, Bertrand Russell, 3rd Earl, 1872-1970.  The art of philosophizing and other essays.  Littlefield  Adams Quality Paperback, 1974 c1968; 1st published 19  .  119p.  #1955  3.20

B1649.R93D5 1993   Russell, Bertrand Russell, 3rd Earl, 1872-1970.   …Dictionary of mind, matter & morals.  Edited with an introduction by Lester E. DeNonn.  Carol Publishing Group: A citadel press Book, 1993 c1952.  [xii], 290p.  Chronological list of works from which selections are taken p.281-286.  #9007  4.25

B1649.R93O8 1960   Russell, Bertrand Russell, 3rd Earl, 1872-1970.  Our knowledge of the external world.  New American Library:  Mentor, 1960 c1956; 1st published 1929.  191p..  Index.  #5593  .25

B1649.R93O9 1995   Russell, Bertrand Russell, 3rd Earl, 1872-1970.  An outline of philosophy.  Rev. with an introduction by John G. Slater, rev.  Routledge, c1995; 1st published 1927.  xii, 247p.  Index.  #10118  8.55

B1649.R93U5 1950   Russell, Bertrand Russell, 3rd Earl, 1872-1970.  Unpopular essays.  Simon & Schuster, 1950.  175p.  #8099  3.20

B1649.R94A33   Russell, Bertrand Russell, 3rd Earl, 1872-1970.  The autobiography of …  Bantam Books, 1969-1970, c1967-1969.  3v. (308, 404, 338p.)  Indexes.        v.1, 1872-1914.   v.2, 1914-1944.  v.3, 1944-1969.  #5320, 9747-9748  1.65

BF1674.W344P4 1950   Watkin, Edward Ingram, 1888-           A philosophy of form.  34d ed., rev. & enl.  Sheed and Ward, c1950; 1st published c1938.  xxviii, 442p.  Contains bibliographical footnotes.  Index.  #13164  .55

B1674.W353D5 1956   Whitehead, Alfred North, 1861-1947.  Dialogues.  As recorded by Lucien Price.  New American Library: Mentor, 1956 c1954.  320p.  Books by A.N.W., p.300.  Index.  #1742  .50

B1674.W37M6 1958   Whitehead, Alfred North, 1861-1947.  Modes of thought: six lectures delivered in Wellesley College, Massachusetts and Two lectures in the University of Chicago.  Capricorn Books, 1958 c1938.  ix, 241p..  Index.  #9104 2.15

B1837.D4 1952   Descartes, René, 1596-1650.  Rules for the direction of the mind; Discourse on the method; Meditations on first philsophy; Objections against the meditations and replies [translated by Elizabeth S. Haldane and G. R. T. Ross]; The geometry [translated by David Eugene Smith and Marcia L. Latham] by René Descartes.  Ethics, by Benedict de Spinoza [translated by W. H. White; rev. by A. H. Stirling].  Encyclopaedia Britannica, c1952.  x, 463p., illus.  (Great books of the Western World; v.31).  #13323  5.35

B1837.V4 1959   Descartes, René, 1596-1650.   The meditations and selections from the Principles of René Descartes (1596-1650).  Translated by John Veitch.  Open Court, 1959.  xl, 248p., notes, facsimilies of the original title pages.  (Religion of Science Library; no. 51).  Essay on the Philosphy of Descartes, by L. Levy-Bruhl, p.vii-xxx.  Contents;  I. The Meditations.  II. The Principles of Philosophy #18  .75

B1853.E5C73 1998   Descartes, René, 1596-1650.  Meditations on first philosophy in which the existence of God and the distinction of the soul from the body are demonstrated.  3rd ed.  Translated from the Latin by Donald A. Cress.  Hachett Publishing Company, 1998 c1993.  xiv, 59p.  Selected Bibliography p.x-xiv.  #9440  5.30

B1875.S713 1963   Spinoza, Bernard, 1632-1677.  Earlier philosophical writings: The Cartesian principles and Thoughts on metaphysics.  Trans­lated by Frank A. Hayes with an introduction by David Bidney.  Bobbs-Merrill: Library of the Liberal Arts, 1963.  161p.  #3147  1.10

B1901.P44E5 1958   Pascal, Blaise, 1623-1650.   Pascal’s pensées.  Introduction by T.S. Eliot.  Dutton, 1958.  xix, 297p.; notes p.273-287.  Index.  #970  Exchange .00

B1901.P44E5 1961   Pascal, Blaise, 1623-1650.   Pensées.  Translated with an introduction by J. M. Cohen.  Penguin, 1961.  287p.  #19.  1.25

B1911.P44 1960   Les Philosophes: the philosophers of the enlightenment and modern democracy.  Edited, with an introduction, by Norman L. Torrey.  Capricorn Books, c1960.  287p.  Suggested Reading p.7.  #10710  3.20

B2012.A5V4 1972   Diderot, Denis, 1713-1784.  Oeuvres philosophiques.  Éditions Garnier Frères, 1972 c1964.  Textes établis avec introductions, bibliographies et notes par Paul Vernière.  Édition illustree.  xl, 649p., pors, fasim.  Contents: Pensées philosophiquesLettre sur les AveuglesDe l’interprétation de la natureEntretien entre d’Alimbert et DiderotLe réve de d’AlembertSuite de l’entretien.  Principes philosophiques sur la matiére et le mouvement.  Entretien d’un père avec ses enfants.  Supplément au voyage de Bougainville.  Entretien d’un philosophe avec las Maréchale de ***.  Réfutation suive de l’ouvrage d’Helvetius Intitulé l’homme (Extraits).  Lettre apologétique de l’Abbe Raynal A. M. Grimm.#11675  10.70.

B2012.E5B3 1982   Diderot, Denis, 1713-1784.  Rameau’s nephew and other works.  Translated by Jacques Barzun and Ralph H. Bowen, with an introduction by Ralph H. Bowen.  Bobbs-Merrill Educational Publishing: The Library of Liberal Arts, 1982 c1964; 1st published 1956.  xviii, 317p.  Contents:  Rameau’s nephewD’Alembert’s dreamSupplement to Bougainville’s “Voyage.”  The two friends from BourbonneA conversation between a father and his childrenThe encyclopediaRegrets on parting with my old dressing gown.  #8001  3.20

B2012.E5N3 1972   Diderot, Denis, 1713-1784.   Neveu de Rameau et autres textes.  Postface de Jacques Proust.  Le Livre de Poche, 1972.  507p., chron. p.503-507.  #507  1.80

B2132.E5 1990   Rousseau, Jean-Jacques, 1712-1778.  The first and second discourses, together with the Replies to critics and Essays on the origin of languages.  Edited, translated and anntated by Victor GourevitchHarper & Row: Harper Torchbooks, 1990 c1986.  ix, 390p.  Editor’s Notes p.296-375.  Index.  #9604  3.20

B2228.E5B7 1957   Comte, Auguste, 1798-1857.  General view of positivism.  Official Centenary Edition.  R. Speller & Sons, 1957.  444p.  #1645  .25

B2430.B4D72 1954   Bergson, Henri, 1859-1941.  The two sources of morality and religion.  Translated by R. Ashley Audra and Claredstay Brereton.  With the assistance of W. Horslass Carter.  Doubleday Anchor Books, 1954 c1935; 1st published 1932.  320p..  Index.  #8024  .50

B2430.B4 P362 1946   Bergson, Henri, 1859-1941.  The creative mind: an introduction to metaphysics.  Translated by Mabelle L. Andison.  The Philosophical Library: The Wisdom Library, 1946.  252p.  Includes two introductory essays and articles or lectures, 1903-1923, 1st published as Pensée et le movant.  #7554  1.10

B2430.G44E56 1957   Gilson, Etienne Henri, 1884-1978.       A Gilson reader: selected writings.  Edited, with an introduction, by Anton C. Regis.  Doubleday: Image Books, 1957.  358p.  Notes at ends of selections.  The Writings of Etienne Gilson p.348-351.  Index.  #7451  .50

B2430.M33R32 1952   Maritain, Jacques, 1882-1973.  The range of reason.  Scribners, 1952.  227p., bibliographical footnotes.  Index.  #1801  .01

B2430.M34D68 2003   Dougherty, Jude P., 1930-      Jacques Maritain: an intellectual profile. The Catholic University of America Press, c2003. [viii], 128p., front. Contains bibliographical footnotes.  Bibliography .117-120.  #15808 6.40

B2430.S34B68 1972   Brée, Germaine.  Camus and Sartre: crisis and commitment.  A Delta Book, c1972.  xi, 287p.  bibliographical notes at ends of chapters.  Index.  #12485  1.05

B2430.S34M8 1987   Murdoch, Iris, 1919-1999.  Sartre: romantic rationalist.  [With a new introduction.]  Penguin Books, c1987; 1st published c1953.  158p.  Bibliography p.151-158.  #10102  4.10

B2430.T373C5813 1979b   Teihard de Chardin, Pierre, 1881-1955.  Heart of the matter.  Translated by René Hague.  Harcourt Brace: Harvest, 1979 c1978.  Part in Écrits du temps de la guerre.  276p., Wokrs p.241-251; Bibliography p.253-261.  Index.  #1572  4.23

B2430.T373C63 1970   Teilhard de Chardin, Pierre, 1881-1955.  Building the earth and The psychological conditions of human unification.  With an introductory essay on Teilhard de Chardin by John Kobler.  Foreword by Max H. Bégouën of the Association of Friends of Teilhard de Chardin.  Avon: Discus Books, 1970 c1969; selections published earlier.  xiv, 116p.  For Further Reading p.113-116.  #10805  1.35

B2430.T373H93 1986   Teilhard de Chardin, Pierre, 1881-1955.  Hymn of the universe.  Translated by Gerald Vann.  Collins: Fount Paperback, 1986 c1965; 1st published 1961.  144p.  Includes Pensées, selected by Fernan de Terdivel.  #5019  1.70

B2430.W474A6313 1994   Abosch, Heinz, 1918-        Simone Weil: an introduction.  Translated from the German by Kimberly A. Kenny.  Pennbridge Books, 1994 c1993.  144p.  Selected Bibliography p.141-142.  Chronology p.143-144.  #9153  1.60

B2521.P44 1983   Peikoff, Leonard S., 1933-      The ominous parallels: the end of freedom in America. Introduced by Ayn Rand. New American Library: A Mentor Book c1982. xii, 12-352p. References p.317-341. Index.  #28SE85 4.13

B2558.S3 1965   Leibniz, Gottfried Wilhelm, Freiherr von, 1646-1716.  Monadology and other philosophical essays.  Translated by Paul Schrecker and Anne Martin Schrecker.  With an introduction and notes by Paul Schrecker.  Bobbs-Merrill Company: The Library of Liberal Arts, 1965.  xxx, 163p.  Bibliographical footnotes.  Includes: “Critical Remarks Concerning the General,” Part of Descartes’ Principles (1692) p.22-80; “What Is Nature(1698) p.95-113; “A Vindication of God’s Justice” (1710) p.114-147.  #9705  4.30

B2558.W5 1951   Leibniz, Gottfried Wilhelm, Freiherr von, 1646-1716.  …Selections.  Edited by Philip P. Wiener.  Charles Scribner’s Sons, 1951.  606p.  Table of Sources of Selections in this volume p.601-606.  I. On Method.  II. First Principles: Foundations of the Sciences.  III. Theory of Knowledge and Metaphysics.  IV. Ethics, Law, and Civilization.  #9401  3.20

B2599.G63S74 2006   Stewart, Matthew.  The courtier and the heretic: Leibniz, Spinoza, and the fate of God in the modern world.  W. W. Norton & Company, c2006.  351p.  A Note on Sources p.327-331.  Bibliography p.332-339.  Acknowledgements p.341.  Index.   #13518  18.15

B2621.B68 1962   Bredvold, Louis Ignatius, 1888-     The brave new world of the enlightenment.  The University of Michigan Press, 1962 c1961.  [vi], 164p.  Notes p.159-164.  These six lectures were originally given at St. Olaf College in October and November 1958, revised and somewhat expanded for publication. – Acknowledgement.  #13126  5.00

B2621.H3   Hampson, Norman, 1922-        The Enlightenment.  Penguin Books, 1990 c1982; 1st published 1968.  304p.  Appendix I: The Eighteenth Century Lifespan of Some of the More Important Writers, p.287.  II: Some of the Main Works p.288-289.  Bibliographical Note p.291-298.  Index.  #9660  4.30

B2755.F91 1949   Kant, Immanuel, 1724-1804.   The philosophy of Kant: Immanuel Kant’s moral and political writings.  Edited, with an introduction, by Carl J. Friedrich.  The Modern Library, 1949.  476p.  #5914  2.00

B2766.E6B4 1976   Kant, Immanuel, 1724-1804.  Foundations of the metaphysics of morals and What is enlightenment?  Translated, with an introduction by Lewis White Beck.  Bobbs-Merrill: the Library of Liberal Arts, 1976 c1959; 1st published, 1785, Grundlegung zur metaphysiker sitten.  xxiv, 92p.  Selected Bibliography p.xxiii-xxiv.  #7745  3.20

B2778.E5S6 1965   Kant, Immanuel, 1724-1804.  Critique of pure reason.  Translated by Norman Kemp Smith.  unabridged ed.  St. Martins Press, 1965 c1929; 2d aufl., 1787, Kritik der veinen Vernuft; 1st published 1781.  xiii, 681p..  Index.  #7746  5.10

B2783.E5M5 1952.   Kant, Immanuel, 1724-1804.  The critique of judgement.  Translated with analytical indexes by James Creed Meredith.  Clarendon Press, c1952; 1st published 1790.  2v. in 1 (246, 180p.)  Critique of aesthetic judgement.  Critique of teleological judgement.  Indeexes.  #10371  14.00

B2791.E5G7 1960   Kant, Immanuel, 1724-1809.  Religion within the limits of reason alone.  Translated with an introduction and notes by Theodore M. Greene and Hoyt H. Hudson.  With a new essay “The ethical significance of Kant’s Religion.” by John R. Silber.  Harper & Row: Harper Torchbooks, c1960; 1st published 1934.  cxlv, 190; cxlvii-clv.  Dates in Kant’s Life, p.cxliii-cxlv.  Indexes.  #10332  4.25

B2792.E5C3 1996   Kant, Immanuel, 1724-1804.  Prolegomena to any fuiture metaphysics that can qualify as a science.  Transltaed by Paul Carus.  Open Court, 1996 c1902.  [iv], 255p. Kant’s Philosophy, by Paul Carus p.167-240.  Chronology p.241-245.  Indexes.  #9033  8.50

B2794.L62E5 1988   Kant, Immanuel, 1724-1804.  Logic.  Translated with an introduction by Robert S. Hartman and Wolfgang Schwarz.  Dover Publications, 1988 c1974; 1st published 1800 as Immanuel Kants Logik.  cxv, 164p.  Indexes.  #5580  4.00

B2794.V642E54 1978   Kant, Immaneul, 1724-1804.  Lectures on philosophical theology.  Translated by Allen W. Wood and Gertude M. Clark.  With introduction and notes by Allen W. Wood.  Cornell University Press, c1978; translation of Volesungen über die philosophiche Religionslehre, 1st published 1877.  175p.  Apprendix: A History of Natural Theology, according to Meiner’s Historia doctrinae de uno vero Deo (1780) p.165-170.  #10416  6.95

B2798.H6313 1974   Hoffe, Otfried, 1943-       Kant. Translated by Marshall Farrier. State University of New York Press, c1994; 1st published 1992. x, 290p. (SUNY Series in Ethical Theory). Contains bibliographical references. Abbreviations p.ix. Notes p.249-252. Chronology p.253-255. Bibliography p.257-278. Indexes.  #15854 1.10

B2798.K6 1955 Körner, Stephen, 1913-      Kant.  Penguin Books, c1955.  230p.  Some Biographical and Bibliographical Notes p.218-224.  Index.  #12371  .50

B2798.S2 1993   Schott, Robin May, 1954-      Cognition and eros: a critique of the Kantian paradigm. Pennsylvania State University Press, 1993; 1st published c1988. xiv, 247p. Notes p.199-233. References p.233-240. Index. #15767 6.40

B2798.S37 2010   Scruton, Roger. Kant: a brief in sight. Illustrated ed. Sterling Publishing Co., Inc., c2010;1st published 1982; rev. 2001. xiv, 163p., front., illus. (part color). Further Reading p.153-156. Index. Picture Credits p.162-163.  #14461 2.15

B2799.E8P3 1967   Paton, Herbert James, 1887-        The categorical imperative: a stody in Kant’s moral philosophy.  5th ed.  Harper & Row: Harper Torchbooks, 1967 c1965; 1st published 1947.  283p.  Bibliographical footnotes.  Indexes.  #10111  3.20

B2844.B53E5 1956   Fichte, Johann Gottlieb, 1762-1814.  The vocation of man.  Edited with an introduction by Roderick M. Chisholm.  Bobbs-Merrill: Library of Liberal Arts, 1956; 1st published 1800.  154p.  #5157  1.10

B2928.E5M54 1977   Hegel, Georg Wilhelm Friedrich, 1770-1831.  …Phenomenology of spirit.  Translated by A. V. Miller with analysis of the text and foreword by J. N. Findlay.  Oxford University press, c1977; from the Phänomenolgie des Geistes, 5th ed., ed. by J. Hoffmeister, 1952; 1st published 1807.  xxxv, 595p.  Index.  #9485  19.25

B2948.S85 1955   Stace, Walter Terrence, 1886-        The philosophy of Hegel: a systematic exposition.  Dover Publications, 1955 c1924.  xi, 526p.  Bibliographical footnotes.  Index. Diagram of the Hegelian System (fold out at back).  #9564  4.20

B2971.W4E5 1989   Feuerbach, Ludwig, 1804-1872.  The essence of Christianity.  Translated by George Eliot.  Prometheus Books, c1989.  2nd ed. 1st published 1843 as Das Wessen des Christentums.  xxiv, 339p. (Great Books in Philosophy).  Contains bibliographical footnotes.  #13376  4.10

B3068.A32 1985   Maimon, Salomon, 1754-1800.   Solomon Maimon: an autobiography.  Edited and with a preface by Moses Hadas.  Schocken Books, 1985 c1975.  110p.  #960  1st published 1947.  1.89

B3118.E5A63 1970   Schopenhauer, Arthur, 1788-1860.  Essays and aphorisms.  Selected and translated with an introduction by R. J. Hollingdale.  Penguin Books, 1970.  238p.  #1568  8.62

B3118.E5S47   Schopenhauer, Arthur, 1788-1860.  Essays of…  Selected and translated by T. Bailey Sanders.  A.L. Burt Company: Burt’s Home Library, n.d.  xxii, 455p.  Contents: The wisdom of life.  Counsels and maxims.  Religion and other essays.  The art of literature.  Studies in pessimism.  #9573  1.10

B3138.E5 P28   Schopenhauer, Arthur, 1788-1860.  The world as will and representation.  Translated from the Germany by E.F.J. Payne.  Dover Publications, 1966 c1958.  2v. (xxx, 534; ix, 687p.)  Selected Bibliography v.1: xxix-xxx.  Index in v.2.   #9172, 10534  6.85

B3213.B83I213 1958   Buber, Martin, 1878-1965.  I and thou.  1st ed. with a postcript by the author added.  Translated by Ronald Gregor Smith.  Charles Scribner’s Sons, 1958.  137p.  #1526  .25

B3216.C33 E7   Cassier, Ernst, 1874-1935.   An essay on man; an introduction to a philosophy of human culture.  Doubleday: Anchor Books, 1944.  294p., bibl. notes.  Index  #20  .95

B3216.C33L63 1974   Cassier, Ernst, 1874-1935.  The logic of the humanities.  Translated by Clarence Smith Howe.  Yale University Press, 1974 c1961.  xx, 217p.  Bibliographical footnotes.  #9093  2.15

B3258.H324H32 1982   Habermas, critical debates.  Edited by John B. Thompson and David Held.  The MIT Press, 1983 c1982.  vii, 324p.  Select Bibliography p.318-322.  Notes on Contributors p.323-324.  #11955  exchange

B3279.H47E5 1993   Heidegger, Martin, 1887-1976.  Basic writings from Being and time (1927) to The task of living (1964).  2d rev. & exp. ed., Edited with introduction by David Farell Krell.  Harper San Francisco, 1993.  452p.  Suggestions for Further Study p.450-452.  #1597  2.87

B3279.J32E52 1989   Jaspers, Karl, 1883-1969.  Philosophy and the world: selected essays and lectures.  Translated by E. B. Ashton.  Regnery Gateway, 1989 c1963.  vi, 314p.  #9108  4.25

B3312.E5K21 1989   Nietzsche, Friedrich, 1844-1900.  On the genealogy of morals.  Translated by Walter Kaufman and R. J. Hollingdale.  Ecce homo.  Translated by Walter Kaufman.  Random House, Inc.: Vintage Books, 1989 c1967.  xii, 267p.  Contains bibliographical footnotes.  Acknowldegement p.ix.  Appendix [to Genalogly]: Seventy Aphorisms from Five Volumes p.165-198.  Appendix [to Ecce homo]: Variants from Nietzsche’s Drafts p.337-364.  Indexes.  #13125  5.99

B3313.A4 1994   Nietzsche, Friedrich, 1844-1900.  Also sprach Zarathustra: ein buch fur alle und keinen.  Mit einer Einleitung von Karl-Heinz Ebnet.  SWAN Buch-Vertreib, 1994.  382p.  Bibliography p.381-382 (Die Deutschen Klassiker, 31).  #1358  5.34

B3313.A43E5 1981   Nietzsche, Friedrich Wilhelm, 1844-1900.  Thus spake Zarathustra: a book for everyone and no one.  Translated with an introduction by R. J. Hollingdale.  Penguin Books, 1981 c1969.  New introduction; 1st published c1961.  343p.  Notes [on Nietzsche’s vocabulary] p.309-343.  #10488  .95

B3313.E22E5 2004   Nietzsche, Friedrich Wilhelm, 1844-1900.  Ecce homo: how one becomes what one is.  Translated with notes by R. J. Hollingdale.  Introduction by Michael Tanner.  Penguin Books, 2004; reprinted with introduction c1992; 1st published 1979; originally published 1908.  xxv, 111p.  Note on the Text p.xviii-xix.  Chronology p.xx-xxii.  Further Reading p.xxii.  Notes p.105-110.  #1305  12.90

B3313.F72E5 1974b   Nietzsche, Friedrich Wilhelm, 1844-1900.  The gay science: with a prelude in rhymes and an appendix of songs.  Translated with commentary by Walter Kaufmann.  Random House: Vintage Books, c1974.  xviii, 396p.  Bibliographical footnotes.  Index.  Based on 2nd edition of Die frôhliche wissenswchaft, 1887.  #11654  3.15

B3313.G3 1960   Nietzsche, Friedrich Wilhelm, 1844-1900.   Joyful wisdom.  F. Ungar, 1960.  370p.  #23.  1.75

B3313.M5E5 1985   Nietzsche, Friedrich Wilhelm, 1844-1900. Human, all to human: a book for all spirits. Translated by Marion Faber with Stehen Lehmann. Introduction and notes by Marion Faber. University of Nebraska Press, 1985 c1984; first published as Mensliches, Altzumenschliches. xxviii, 275p.  Acknowledgements p.vii. Index.  #13086 7.35

B3313.M73E5 2001   Nietzsche, Friedrich Wilhelm, 1844-1900.  Daybreak: thoughts on the prejudices of morality.  Edited by Maude Marie Clark and Brian Leiter.  Translated by R. J. Hollingdale.  Cambridge University press, 2001 c1997; 1st published as Morgenrothe, 1886.  xliii, 247p., Chronology p.xxxv-xxvii.  Further Reading po. xxxviii-xli.  Index.  #11826  7.80

B3316.C48 1996   Chamberlain, Lesley, 1951-      Nietzsche in Turin: an intimate biography. St. Martin’s Press: Picador USA c1996. xiv, 256p. Acknowledgements p.v. Nietzsche’s Live and Works: a comparative chronology p.ix-xi. Notes p.219-252. Bibliography p.253-256.  #15890 1.75

B3316.K3 1950   Kaufmann, Walter.   Nietzsche: Philosopher, psychologist, antichrist. Meridian Books, 1950.  412p., Key to abbrev. & Bibliographical notes.  Index  #25  1.55

B3317.C29 1999   The Cambridge companion to Nietzsche.  Edited by Bernd Magnus and Kathleen M. Higgins.  Cambridge University Press, 1999 c1996.  ix, 403p.  Selected Bibliography p.385-397.  Index.  #11823  11.80

B3317.M254 1993   Magnus, Bernd, Stewart, Stanley, 1931- and Milieur, Jean-Pierre. Nietsche’s case: philosophy as/and literature. Routledge c1993. xiv, 284p. Bibliographical Note p.1-x-xi. Acknowledgements p.xiii. Notes p.257-277. Index.  #15818 2.15

B3376.W563 P6 1965   Wittgenstein, Ludwig, 1889-1951.  Preliminary studies for the ‘Philosophical investigations,’ generally  known as The blue and brown books.  2d ed.  Harper Collophon Books, 1963 c1960.  192p..  Index.  #1095 Exchange.

B3376.W563U313 1972   Wittgenstein, Ludwig, 1889-1951.  Uber gewissheit/On certainty.  Edited by G. E. M. Anscombe and G. H. von Wright.  Translated by Dennis Paul and G. E. M. Anscombe.  Harper Torchbooks, 1972 c1969.  81, 81e p.  #1382  6.74

B3376.W564E36 2002   Edmonds, David and Eidinow, John.  Wittgenstein’s poker: the story of a ten-minute argument between two great philophers.  HarperCollinsPublishers: Ecco, 2002 c2001.  xii, 340p.  Chronology p.295-305.  Appendix: Times Literary Supplement Letters p.306-312.  Acknowledgements p.313-316.  Sources p.317-327.  Index.  #12858  .50

B3376.W564J36 1973   Janik, Allan S. & Toulmin, Stephen E.  Wittgenstein’s Vienna.  Simon & Schuster: Touchstone, 1973.  314p., front, photos, Selected Bibliography p.289-301.  Index.  #1362  5.34

B3376.W564P36 1975   Pears, David Francis.  Wittgenstein.  Fontana/Collins, 1975 c1971.  188p.  Short Bibliography p.187-188.  (Modern masters).  #10116  .50

B3581.P73 E43 1961   Vico, Giambattista, 1668-1740.   The new science of… tr. from the 3d ed (1744); abridged & rev. with a new introd.  Doubleday: Anchor Books, 1961.  384p.  #29  .70

B3581.P73G414 2007   Vico, Giambattista, 1668-1744. Keys to the new science: translations, commentaries and essays. Edited by Thora Ilin Bayer and Donald Phillip Verene. Cornell University Press, c2009. xiv, 209p., front. port., facsimilies. Illustrations p.vii. Acknowledgements p.ix-x. Abbreviations p.xi. Contents: Synopsis of Universal Law p.17-38. On the One Principle and One End of Universal Law p.39-42. On the Constancy of the Jurisprudent p.45-59. “On Homer and His Two Poems” p.61-71. Vico’s Address to His Readers from a Last Manuscript on Jurisproudence p.73-81. Vici Vindiciae p.85-105. Vindicatio of Vico p.107-135. Ignota Ladebat p.143-166. Tree of the Poetic Sciences and Use of the Muses p.167-178. Reprehension of the Metaphysics of Rene Descartes, Bnedict Spinoza, and John Locke p.179-198. Vico’s Writings in English Translation p.199-204. Index.  #15080 1.70

B3583.B46 1976   Berlin, Isaiah, Sir, 1909-1997. Vico and Herder: two studies in the history of ideas. Chatto & Windus, c1976. xxviii, 228p. Contains bibliographical footnotes.  #15044 6.35

B3583.V53 1963   Vico, Giambattista, 1668-1740.   The autobiography of…  Cornell University Press (Great Seal Books) 1963 c1944.  240p., notes, supplementary notes, chron..  Index  #110  .98 B3955.Z9 1959   Spinoza, Baruch, 1632-1677.   Arnold Zweig presents the living thoughts of…  Fawcett, 1959 c1949.  128p.  #26.  .50

B3958.E53   Spinoza, Benedictus de, 1632-1677.  Works of  Spinoza.  Translated from the Latin with an introduction by R. H. M. Elewes.  Dover Publications, 1951-1955; first published 1883.  .  2v.  ([x], v-xxxiv, 387; xxii, 420 p.).  Bibliographical footnotes.   v.1, Theologico-political treatise and A political treatise.  Biblio­graph­i­cal notes [at (front].  v.2, On the improvement of the understanding.  The ethics.  Correspondence.  #5029, 13630  16.05

B3974 .E5 S6713 1989  Spinoza, Baruch, 1632-1677.  Ethics; translated by Andrew Boyle and revised by G.H.R. Parkinson.  With an introduction and notes by G.H.R. Parkinson.  Dent: Everyman’s Library, 1989.  259p..  Index.  #1134  2.10

B4201.C43 2007   Chamberlain, Lesley. Motherland: a philosophical history of Russia. Overlook/Rookery, c2007. xxviii, 331p. A comparative Chronologh of Russian and Western Philosophers p.285-287. Notes p.288-312. Suggested Reading p.313-316. Index. #14330 7.50

B4238.B48 D4 1969   Berdyaev, Nicolai, 1874-1948.   The destiny of man.  Harper: Torchbooks, 1960.  310p..  Index  #28.  1.75

B4238.B48O62 1944   Berdyaev, Nicolai, 1874-1948.   Slavery and freedom.  Scribner, 1944.  268p.  #27‑.  1.45 B4372.A5A89 1971   Kierkegaard, Søren Aabye, 1813-1855.  The living thoughts of Kierkegaard.  Presented by W. H. Auden.  Indiana University Press, 1971, Midland Book Edition, 1963 c1952.  225p.  #5915  1.00

B4373.E6       Kierkegaard, Søren Aabye, 1813-1855.  Either/or: a fragment of life.  Edited and translated with introduction and notes by Howard V. Hong and Edna H. Hong.  Princeton University Press, 1987.   pt.  (xix, 702,         )  Notes p.603-607.  Bibliographical note p.671.  Index.  pt.1  #5381  10.57

B4373.F28E5 1954   Kierkegaard, Søren Aabye, 1813-1855.  Fear and trembling and The Sickness unto death.   Tr. with introd. & notes by Walter Lowrie.  Doubleday: Anchor Books, 1954; tr. first published 1941.  278p.  #931  1st pub. 1843, 1849.  .25

B4373.S832E5 1988   Kierkegaard, Søren Aabye, 1813-1855. Stages on life’s way: studies by various persons. Edited and translated with introduction and notes by Howard V. Hong and Edna H. Hong. Princeton University Press, c1988. xviii, 782p. (Kierkegaard’s Writings; 11) Historical Introduction p.vii-xviii. Contents: Lectori Benevolo! In Vino Veritas. Some Reflections on Marriage. Guilty/Not Guilty. Selected Entries from Kierkegaard’s Journals p.561-666. Acknowledgements p.667. Collection of Danish Editions p.669-674. Notes p.675-749. Bibliograhical Note p.751. Index. Advisory Board p.782. #16158 4.30 

B4376.L6 1961   Lowrie, Waltr, 1868-1959.  A short life of Kierkegaard.  Doubleday & Company: Anchor Books, 1961 c1942.  ix, 226p.  Kierkegaard’s Works in English p.218-222.  Index.  #11544  .25

B4377.C29 1998   The Cambridge companion to Kierkegard. Edited by Alastair Hannay and Gordon D. Marino. Cambridge University Press, c1998. xvi, 428p. Contains bibliographical references at ends of articles. Contributors p.ix-xi. Abbreviations p.xiii. Bibliography p.411-419. Index.  #15763 13.50

B4377.G37 1988   Gardner, Patrick L., 1922-        Kierkegaard.  Oxford University Press, 1988.  [vi], 120p.  Abbreviations [of works]  Notes on Suources p.186.  Further Reading p.117-118.  Index.  #9361  4.30

B4378.M48L67 2001   Lorentzen, Jamie. Kierkegaard’s metaphors. Mercer University Press, c2001. xxii,201p. Contains bibliographical footnotes. Acknowledgements p.vii. Abbreviations p.ix-x. Works Cited p.173-178. Index.  #14119 3.25

B4568.O73C63 1963   Ortega y Gasset, José, 1883-1955.  Concord and liberty.  Translated froam the Spanish by Helene Weyl.  W. W. Norton & Company, Inc.: The Norton Library, 1963 c1946; essays 1st published 1933-1942.  182p.  Contents: Concore and Liberty.  Notes on Thinking.  Prologue to a History of Philosophy.  A Chapter from the History of Ideas.  #13203  5.35

B4568.O73I5813 1987   Ortega y Gasset, José, 1883-1955.  Psychological investigations.  Translated by Jorge Garcia-Gomez.  W.W. Norton & Company, c1987.  254p., diagrams.  Appendices p.201-244.  Notes p.245-254.  #11740  9.50

B4568.O73O73 1967   Ortega Y Gasset, José, 1883-1955.  Origin of philosophy.  Authorized translation from the Spanish by Toby Talbot.  Norton, 1967.  125p.  Bibliographic footnotes.  #1588  6.81

B4568.O73S6213 1986   Ortega y Gasset, José, 1883-1955.  Historical reason.  Translated by Philip W. Silver.  W.W. Norton & Company, 1986 c1984; 1st published as Sobre la razon historica; edited by Paulino Garagori.  223p.  Based on lectures given in Buenos Aires, 1940 and Lisbon, 1944.  #9464  6.40

B4568.O73T4 1961   Ortega y Gasset, Jose, 1883-1995.  The modern theme.  Translated from the Spanish by James Clough.  Introduction by José Ferrater Mora.  Harper & Row: Haper Torchbooks/The Academic Library, c1961; 1st publihsed in English, 1931.  vii, 152p.  #10545  4.90

B4568.O73U53 1969   Ortega y Gasset, José, 1883-1955.  Some lessons in metaphysics.  Translated by Mildred Adams.  W. W. Norton & Co., 1969; 1st published 1966 as Unas hecciones de metafisica.  158p.  #9098  1.65

B4568.O74R18 1971   Raley, Harold C.  José Ortega y Gasset: philosopher of European unity.  Prefaces by Julián Marias and J. W. Schwitzer.  The University of Alabama Press, c1971.  xiv, 247p.  Ortegan Terminology p.214-218.  Bibliography p.219-244.  Index.  #13448  8.50

B4568.U53D48 1954   Unamuno, Miguel de, 1864-1936.  Tragic sense of life.  Translator, J. E. Crawford Flitch.  [Introductory essay by S. De Madariega.]  Dover Publications, 1954; reprint of English translation, 1921; 1st published as Del Sentimento Tragico de lalivida, 1912.  xxxv, 332p.  Bibliographical footnotes.  #10093  2.05

B5134.K75I46 2003   Krishamurti, J(iddu), 1895-1986. The impossible question. Orion Books Ltd: Phoenix, 2003; 1st published 1972. 201p. #16492 2.15

B8414.G37 1974   Gardner, Howard.   Quest for mind: Piaget, Levi-Strauss, and the structuralist movement.  Random: Vintage, 1974 c1972.  276, vii p.  Bibliography p.257-276.  Index.  #933  .25

BL-BQ Classification

May 8, 2014

Religion, Mythology, World Religions – 504 Titles

BL1-BL263/Religion in General & Aspects of Religion       BL300-BL477/Myth in General and Aspects of Mythology     BL530-BL628/The Spiritual Experience      BL722-B2441/Mythology in General & Mythologies; Literatures of Asia      BL2525-BL2780/Topics in Religious Life         BM/Judaism     BP/Islam      BQ/Buddhism, Zen

Contains 252 titles.

Updated 19 January 2019

BL31.H37 1995 Ref   The Harper Collins dictionary of religion. General Editor, Jonathan Z Smith … with the American Academy of Religion. HarperCollinsPublishers: HarperSanFrancisco c1995. xxx, 1154p. photos, chronologies. Feature Articles p.vii. Editorial Board p.ix. Contributors p.xi-svii. Acknowledgements p.xxiii-xxiv. Abbreviations p.xxv. Listo of Illustrations p.xxviii. Photograph Credits p.1153-1154.  #11855 24.00

BL31.O93 1997 Ref   The Oxford dictionary of world religions. Edited by John Bowker. Oxford University Press c1997. xxiv, 1111p. Contains bibliographical references. Editors p.ix. Contributors p.x-xii. Topic Index p.1075-1102. Index of Chinese Headwords p.1103-1111.  #5749

BL31.R43   Twentieth century theology in the making. Edited by Jaroslav Pelikan. Translated by R. A. Wilson. Fontana Books/Harper & Row: Collins, 1970 c1969-1970; selections from Die Religion in Geschichte und Gegenwart; 2nd ed., 1927-1932. 3v. (414,          p.) (The Fontana Library: Theology and Philosophy). Acknowledgements. Contains Bible (RSV) and bibliographical references. v.1, Themes of Biblical Theology. v.2, The theological dialogue: issues and resources. v.3, Ecumenicity and renewal.  #10085 2.40  Have: v.1.

BL41.P36 2006   Pals, Daniel L        Eight theories of religion; 2nd ed. Oxford University Press, c2006. xii, 340p. Bibliographies at ends of chapters. Index. #16322 6.75

BL41.V113 1967   Vries, Jan de, 1890-1964. The study of religion: a historical approach. Translated with an introduction by Kees W. Belle. Harcourt, Brace & World, Inc., c1967; 1st published as Godsdientgeschiedens In Vogelvlucht, c1961. xviv, 231p. Acknowledgements p.iv. Notes p.223-228. Index.  #10456 .75

BL42.5.U5P76 2008   Prothero, Stephen. Religious literacy: what every American needs to know – and doesn’t. Harper Collins Publishers: Harper One, 2008 c2007. viii, 372p. Religious Literature Quiz p.293-298. Further Reading p.299-301. Acknowledgements p. 303-305. Notes p.307-352. Index. #16169 1.70

BL48.C5 1985   Chesterton, G(ilbert) K(eith) 1874-1936. The everlasting man. Burns & Oates1985 c1974; 1st published 1925. 274p. #16389 4.30

BL48.E413 1959   Eliade, Mircea, 1907-1986. The sacred and the profane: the nature of religion. Translated from the French by Willard R. Trask. Harcourt brace Jovanovich: A Harvest/HBJ Book, c1958. 256p. Contains bibliographical footnotes. Chronological Survey p.215-232. Selected Bibliography p.234-243. Index.  #1461 1.11

BL48.H8 1957   Huxley, Julian, 1887-1975. Religion without revelation. New American Library: A Mentor Book, 1958 c1957. 222p. Bibliography p.213-215. Index. (1958) .50

BL48.K38 1961   Kaufmann, Walter, 1921-1980. Critique of religion and philosophy. Doubleday & Company, Inc: Anchor Books, 1961 c1958. xxii, 453p. Bibliography p.42-446. Index.  #12269 .85

BL48.N68 1971   Novak, Michael, 1933-      Ascent of the mountain, flight of the dove: an invitation to religious studies. Harper & Row, Publishers, c1971. xvi, 240p. Notes p.210-237. Index of Names.  #14218 .65

BL48.O82 1981   Otto, Rudolf, 1869-1937.  The idea of the holy: an inquiry into the no-rational factor in the idea of the divine and its relation to the rational.  2nd ed.  Translated by John W. Harvey.  Oxford University Press, 1981 c1950; 1st  published 1923.  xxi, 232p.  Bibliographical footnotes.    Translated from Das helige, 9th German ediition.  Index.  #11681  1.05

BL48.S33 1958   Schleirmacher, Friedrich Daniel Ernst, 1768-1834. On religion: speeches to its cultured despisers. Introduction by Rudolf Otto. Translated by John Oman. Harper & Row Publishers: Harper Torchbooks/The Cloister Library, c1958; from the 3rd ed., 1831; 1st published 1799 as Ueber die Religion: Redenan die Gibeldeten unter ihren Verächter. xxiv, 287p. The First Edition, by Oman p.275-284. Index.

BL48.T34 1961   Tagore, Rabindranath, Sir, 1861-1941. The religion of man: being [an expansion of] the Hibbert Lectures for 1930. Beacon Press, 1961, c1931. 239p. (Hibbert Lectures). Index. Appendices: I, The Baul Singers of Begal p.209-221. II. Note on the Nature of Reality (a conversation with Albert Einstein) p.222-225. III, Dadu and the Mystery of Form p.226-230. IV, An Address in the Chapel of Manchester College, Oxford p.231-237.  reclassified

BL48.T44 1956   This is my faith: the convictions of representative Americans today.  Edited by Stewart G. Cole.  Harper & Brothers, 1956.  viii, 291p.  #9063  .60 BL48.W475 1984   Wiebe, Paul, 1938-       The architecture of religion: a theoretical essay. Foreword by Walter H. Capps. Trinity University Press, c1984. xvi, 153p. Notes p.139-149. (Trinity University Monograph Series in Religion, v.8). Index.  #14998 1.10

BL48.Y59 1992   Young, Dudley.  Origins of the sacred: the ecstasies of love and war.  Harper Perennial, 1992 c1991.  493p.  Bibliography p.463-468.  Index.  #5228  3.20

BL50.M35 1972   Mead, Margaret, 1901-1978.  Twentieth century faith: hope and survival.  Harper & Row, c1972.  xix, 172p.  (Religious Perspectives, v.25).  Religious Perspectives: Its Meaning and Purpose, by Ruth Nanda Ansum p.xi-xviii.  Acknowledgements p.171-172.  #12188  1.05

BL50.T69 1956   Toynbee, Arnold, 1889-1975. An historian’s approach to religion. Oxford University Press, c1956. x, 318p. (Gifford Lectures, 1952 & 1953). Contains bibliographical footnotes. Index. #15796 .25

BL51.B843 1957  Buber, Martin.   Eclipse of God; studies in the relation between religion and philosophy.  Harper: Torchbooks, 1957 c1952.  152p., notes, index.  #47  1.15

BL51.F318 1993   Faith in theory and practice: essays on justifying religious belief.  Edited by Elizabeth S. Radcliffe and Carol J. White.  Open Court, 1993.  235p.  Footnotes at ends of chapters.  Index.  #5592  6.45

BL51.H4695 1993   Herder, Johann Gottfried, 1744-1803.  Against pure reason: writings on religion, language and history.  Translated, edited, and with an introduction by Marcia Burge.  Fortress Press, c1993.  xx, 264p.  Select Bibliography p.xii-xx.  #10822  18.50

BL51.H488 1993   Hick, John (Harwood) 1922-2012. Disputed questions in the theology and the philosophy of religion. Yale University Press, c1973. x, 198p. Bibliographical notes at the ends of chapters. Index. #16118 2.15

BL51.H98 2009  Huxley, Aldous.  Perennial philosophy.  Harper & Row: Perennial Modern Classics, 2009 c1945.  xii, 312, 28p. A List of Recommended Books p. 303-306. Index p.307-312. About the Author p.2-5. About the Book p.6-22. The Complete Aldous Huxley Bibliography p.23-24. #1109r  20.25

BL51.P316 1962   Patton, H.J.  The modern predicament: a study in the philosophy of religion.  Collier Books, 1962 c1955.  414p.  Index.  #8025  .50

BL51.K54 1974   Kierkegaard, Soren Aabye, 1813-1855. Philosophical fragments; or, A fragment of philosophy by Johannes Climacus. Originally translated and introduced by David F. Swenson. New introduction and commentary by Niels Thulstrap. Translation revised and commentary translated by Howard V. Hong. Princeton University Press, 1967, c1936, 1962. xcviii, 260p. Commentary p.141-260p. #9676 6.95

BL51.R326 2003   Reason and religious belief: an introduction to the philosophy of religion. Michaedl Peterson et. al. 3rd ed. Oxford University Press, c2003. x, 326p. Questions notes and suggested readings at the ends of chapters. Indexes.  #15030 2.20

BL51.S66 1964   Smith, Wilfrid Cantwell.  The meaning and end of religion: a new approach to the religious traditions of mankind.  New American Library: Mentor, 1964 c1963.  352p.  Notes p.182-344.  Index.  #1718  .75

BL51.T683  1957   Trueblood, David Elton, 1900-         Philosophy of religion.  Harper & Brothers, c1957.  xv, 324p.  Bibliographical footnotes.  Appendix p.307-318.  Bibliographical notes p.315-318.  Index.  #11811  5.00

BL51.W27 2004   Ward, Keith, 1938-      The case for religion. One World, c2004. viii, 246p. Notes p.238-241. Index.  #14495 3.20 BL51.W3713 1970   Watts, Alan W.  Nature, man, and woman.  Random House: Vintage Books, 1970 c1958.  209p.  Bibliographical References p.207-209.  #1273  1.07

BL51.W379 1962   Wells, Donald A.  God, man, and the thinker: philosophies of religion.  Random House,  c1962.  xv, 507p.  Summary Questions p.445-462.  Bibliography p.483-493.  Index.  #13200  .80

BL51.W46 1944   Werfel, Franz, 1890-1945. Between heaven and earth. Translated by Max Newmark.Philosophical Library, c1944; 1st published as Swischen oben uncunter. xii, 13-252p. I, Of Man’s True Happiness. II, Realism and Inwardness. III, Can We Life without Faith in God? IV, Theologoumena [6 sections]. #5796 reclassified .25

BL53.D6 1970   Dodds, Eric Robertson, 1893-    Pagan and Christian in an age of anxiety: some aspects of religious experience from Marcus Aurelius to Constantine.  W. W. Norton & Company, 1970 c1965.  xiii, 144p., bibliographical footnotes.  Index.  #12329  3.00

BL53.J56 1959   Johnson, Paul Emanuel.  Psychology of religion.  Rev. & enl.  Abingdon Press, 1959.  304p.  bibliography p.293-297.  Index.  #8026  1.00

BL53.L27 1990   Lash, Nicholas.  Easter in ordinary: reflections on human experience and the knowledge of God.  University of Notre Dame Press, 1990 c1998.  xi, 313p.  (The Richard Lectures for 1986, University of Virginia).  Bibliography p.299-308.  Index.  #12185  1.05

BL53.P47 1970   Personality and religion: the role of religion in personality development. Foreword by Martin E. Marty, General Editor. Harper & Row, Publishers, c1970. x, 245p. (Harper Forum Books). Acknowledgements p. x. Notes ate ends of articles. #13848 4.55

BL53.P8 1943   Pratt, James Bissett, 1875-1944.  The religious consciousness: a psychologicl study.  The Macmillan Company, 1943 c1920.  ix, 488p.  Bibliographical footnotes.  Index.  #10746  1.10

BL53.R444 1970   The relgious personality.  Edited by Donald Capps & Walter H. Corps.  Wordsworth Publishing Co., c1970.  x, 381p.  Suggestions for Further Reading at ends of selections.  Author Index.  #11475  .25

BL53.S575 2004   Sloan, D.Jason. Theological incorrectness: why relligious people believe what they shouldn’t. Oxford University Press, c2004. xii, 156p. Bibliography p.127-151. Index.  #14350 6.30

BL55.D31929   Dawson, Christopher, 1889-1970. Progress & religion. Sherwood Sugden & Company Publishers. First published c1929. Contains bibliographical footnotes. Bibliography p.251-254. #16128 gift

BL60.S614 1989   Social consequences of religious belief. Edited by William Reace Garrett. Paragon House: A New Era Book, c1989. x, 242p. (God, the contemporary discussion series). Notes at ends of articles. Contributors p.227. Index.  #9863 1.05

BL60.T87 1991   Turner, Bryan S.  Religion and social theory.  2d ed.  SAGE Publications, 1991.  264p.  Bibliography p.247-260.  Index.  #5719  1.10

BL65.H78T72 1991   Traer, Robert.  Faith in human rights: support in religious traditions for a global struggle.  Georgetown University Press, c19991.  xii, 239p.  Notes at ends of chapters.  Index.  #12402  free

BL65.I55A53 2007   Albright, Madeleine Korbel. The mighty and the almighty: reflections on America, God and world affairs. With Bill Woodward. Harper Perennial, 2007 c2006. xii, 351p. Notes p.303-319. Acknowledgements p.320-326. Index.

BL65.P4P3613 1995   Panikkar, Raimundo, 1918-     Cultural disarmament: the way to peace.  Translated by Robert R. Barr.  Westminster John Knox Press, c1995; 1st published as Paz y Desarme Cultural, 1993.  ix, 142p.  Bibliography p.129-140.  Index of Authors.  #12378  3.20

BL71.C6613 1992 Ref   Comte, Fernand.  Sacred writings of world religions.  Chambers, 1992; 1st published as Les livres sacré, 1990.  249p., illus.  Index  (Chambers compact reference series).  #1372  5.34

BL72.F73 1968   Fremantle, Anne Jackson, 1909-      Pilgrimage to people.  David McKay, 1968.  231p.  #5829  .50

BL80.B625 1962   Bouquet, A(lan) C(oates), 1884-1976.  Comparative religion; 6th ed. Penguin Books, c1962; 1st published 1941. 320p. A List of Books for Further Study p.307-314. Index.  #10086 3.65

BL80.R65 1956  Ross, Floyd H.   The great relgions by which men live.  (Questions that matter most…).  With Tynette Hills.  Fawcett: Premier, 1956.  192p., index.  #48  .35

BL80.S66 1965   Smith, Huston.  Religions of man.  Harper & Row: Perennial Library, 1965 c1958.  371p.  Notes p.356-366.  Index.  #5149  1.10

BL80.2.C6 1971 Ref   The concise encyclopedia of living faiths.  2nd ed.  Hutchinson of London, c1971; 1st pbulished 1959.  xxii, 436p, maps.  For Further Reading p.415-422p.  Acknowledgements p.423-426.  Index.  #13589  .55

BL80.2N374 1978  Great religions of the world.  A volume in the story of Man Library.  Prepared by National  Geographic.  By Robert McAfee Brown and others.  National Geogrpahic, 1978.  419p., illus., maps, index, Milestones p.414-5, bibl.  #428  10.00

BL80.2.R3 1965   Religions and the promise of the twentieth century: Readings in the history of mankind.  Edited for the International Commission … by Guy S. Métraux and François Crouzet.  New American Library: Mentor, 1965.  277p.  #1768  1.07

BL80.2.S33 1969   Schneider, Del Byron.  No God, but God: a look at Hinduism, Buddhism, and Islam.  Augsburg Publishing House, c1969.  vii, 136p.  Contains bibliographic footnotes.  Glossary p.127-132.  Index.  #13562  1.05

BL85.F67 1999   Ford, David.  Theology: a very short introduction.  Oxford University Press, c1999.  199p., black & whilte illus., photos, facsimilies, diagrams.  Further Reading p.188-193.  Index.  #11260  4.25

BL85.L363 1965   Lanternari, Vittorio.  The religions of the oppressed: a study of modern messianic cults.  Translated from the Italian by Lisa Sergio.  New American Library: A Mentor Book, 1965 c1963.  xvi, 19-286p.  Bibliography p.255-268 & Abbreviations p.269-271.  Index.  #12118  .25

BL85.M22 1969   Maeterlinck, Maurice, 1862-1949.  The great secret.  New foreword by Leslie Shepard.  Carol Publishing Group: A Citadel Press Book, c1969.  xv, 268p.  #11111  1.80

BL85.M32 2005   Marty, Martin E. 1928-     When faiths collide.  Blackwell Publishing, c2005.  x, 193p.  Notes p.179-185.  (Blackwell Manifestoes).  Index.  #12904  18.00

BL85.N54 2008   Niebuhr, Gustav. Beyond tolerance: searching for interfaith understanding in America. Viking, c2008. xxxviii, 218p. Acknowledgements p.197. Notes p.198-207. Bibliography p.208-212. Index.  #14258 5.50

BL96.A53 2007   Ancient religions. Sarah Iles Johnson. The Belknap Press of Harvard University, c2007. xvii, 266p. Bibliographies at ends of articles. Note on Translation and Transliteration p.xiii. Abbreviations p.xv. Maps p.xvi-xvii. Contributions p.253. Index. #16097 3.75

BL96.F78 1959   Frankfort, Henri, 1897-1954,  Before philosophy: the intellectual adventure of ancient manAn essay on speculative thought in the Ancient Near East.  With H. A. Groenewegen Frankfort, John A. Wilson, and Thorkild Jacobsen.  Penguin Books, 1959 c1946.  275p.  Notes and Suggested Readings at ends of chapters.  Index.  #13128  2.00

BL98.N48 1976   The new religious consciousness.  Edited by Charles Y. Glock and Robert N. Bellah.  University of California Press, 1976.  391p.  Bibliographical footnotes.  Index.  #5831  .25

BL180.R43M6 1993   Montaigne, Michel de, 1533-1592.  An apology for Raymond Sebond.  Translate and edited with an introduction and notes by M.A. Screech.  Penguin Books, 1993 c1987.  xliv, 190p.  Further Reading p.xxxviii-xxxix.  #10825  11.75

BL221.K57 2004   Kirsch, Jonathan.  God against the gods: the history of the war between monotheism and polytheism.  Viking Compass, c2004.  xvi, 336p., map.  Bibliography p.315-321.  Index.  #12887  5.00

BL238.L38 1989   Lawrence, Bruce B.  Defenders of God: the fundamentalist revolt against the modern age.  Harper & Row, 1989.  306p.  Selected Bibliography p.277-291.  Index.  #5598  1.00

BL238.S32 2008   Schimmel, Solomon, 1942-        The tenacity of unreasonable beliefs: fundamentalism and the fear of truth. Oxford University Press, 2008. x.282p. Acknowledgements p.v-vii. Notesp.229-262. Bibliography p.263-273. Index. #16187 6.55

BL240.2.B368   Barbour, Ian. Religion in an age of science: The Gifford Lectures, 1989-1990. HarperSanFrancisco, c1990. xvi, 299p. (The Gifford Lectures, v.1). Notes p.271-290. Index of Names. v.1, #14115b .45

BL240.2.D29 1992   Davies, Paul C.W.  Mind of God: the scientific basis for a rational world.  Simon & Schuster: Touchstone, 1993 c1992.  254p.  Selected Bibliography p.239-241.  Index.  #5015

BL240.2.S635 2000   Smith, Huston.  Why religion matters: the fate of the human spirit in an age of disbelief.  HarperSanFrancisco, c2001.  xiv, 290p.  Index.  #11301  7.80

BL240.3.G75 2004   Griffin, David Ray, 1939-        Two great truths: a new synthesis of scientific naturalism and Christian faith. Westminster John Knox Press, c2004. xxii, 130p. Footnotes contain bibliographic references. Notes at the ends of chapters. References p.116-123. Index. #16132 gift

BL240.3.W585 2005   The measure of God: our century-long struggle to reconcile science and religion. HarperCollinsPublishers: HarperSanFrancisco, c2005. x, 358p. Acknowledgements p.vii-ix. Appendix: The Gifford Lectures, 1888-2005, p.305-317. Notes p.319-341. Index. On cover: The Story of the Gifford Lectures.   #13875 2.15

BL245.K63 1989   Koestler, Arthur, 1905-1983.  The sleepwalkers: a history of man’s changing vision of the universe.  With an introduction by Herbert Butterfield.  Arkana, 1989 c1959.  623p.  Selected Bibliography p.555-557.  Index.  #7225  5.35

BL245.W66 1999   Wilson, A. N.   God’s funeral: a biography of faith and doubt in western civilization.  Ballantine Books, c1999.  xiv, 402p., black & white illus.  Bibliography p. 371-384.  Index.  #11708  5.35

BL262.I57 2006   Intelligent thought: science versus the intelligent design movement.  Edited by John Brockman.  Random House, Inc.: Vintage Books, c2006.  xiv, 356p.  Contains bibliographical references.  Contributors identified at ends of articles.  Appendix: Excerpt from the Memorandum Opinion of the U.S. District Court for the Middle District of Pennsylvania, December 20, 2005, p.233-256.  #13403  4.50

BL263.A93 2006   Ayala, Francisco José, 1930-          Darwin and intelligent design.  Fortress Press, c2006.  xii, 116p.  (Facets Series).  Acknowledgements p.105-06.  Notes p.107-113.  Additional Resources p.114-116.  #13581  6.50

BL263.C4 1969   Changing man: the threat and the promise. Five scientists and five theologians on Christian faith and evolution of thought.  Doubleday: Anchor Books, 1969 c1960.  Edited by Kyle Haselden and Philip Hefner.  184p.  Bibliography p.169-173.  Index.  #5582  1.00

BL263.G34 1966   Gatewood, Willard B.  Preachers, pedagogues & politicians: the evolutionary controversy in North Carolina, 1920-1927.  The University of North Carolina Press, c1966.  x, 268p.  Bibliographical footnotes.  Appendices: A. Contempoary Poems p.235-241.  B. Platform, Constittuoons and Bylaws of the North Carolina Bible League p.238-241.  C. The Poole Bill and Our Legislators p.242.  D. Evolution, University and the People p.243-248.  E. Evolution – A Religious Question p.249-250.  Bibliography p.251-259.  Index.  #12963  1.00

BL300.E42 1975  Eliade, Mircea, 1907-        .  Myths, dreams and mysteries: the encounter between contemporary faiths and archaic realities.  Tr. by Philip Mairet.  Harper Torchbooks, 1975 c1960; 1st published 1957.  254p., bibl. footnotes, index.  #871.  9.53

BL303.C4 1991  Chetwynd, Tom.  Age of myth: the Bronze Age as the cradle of the unconscious.   HarperCollins: Mandala, 1991.  236p., diagrs., bibl. p.215-229, index to the Bible p.229-236.  #872  12.67

BL303.K37 1990 Ref   Kaster, Joseph.  Putnam’s concise mythological dictionary.  Based upon Gods by Bessie Redfield.  Putnam: Perigree, 1990 reprint of 1980; 1st published 1963.  182p., illus.  Further Reference p.181-182.  #5234  gift

BL303.K5 1959 Ref   Kirkwood, G. M.   A short guide to classical mythology.  Holt, 1959.  109p.  #49.  1.00

BL303.S9 1993 Ref   Sykes, Egerton. Who’s who in non-classical mythology. Rev. by Alan Kendall. Oxford University Press c1993′ 1st published c1952. xii, 235p. Bibliography p.225-235.  #9388 2.15

BL303.6.C35A3 1991  Campbell, Joseph, 1904-1987.  Hero’s journey: the world of Joseph Campbell… on his life and work.   Ed. w/an introd. by Phil Cousineau. HarperCollins Harper S F, 1991 c1990. 253p., il., photos, Books by p.233-43, bibl. p.235-8, index.  #930  4.24

BL304.E413 1963   Eliade, Mircea, 1907-1986.  Aspects du mythe.  Gallimard, c1963.  251p.  Bibliographical footnotes.  Eléments de bibliographie p.249-251.  #12759  .25

BL304.E413 1975   Eliade, Mircea, 1907-1986. Myth and reality. Translated from the French by Willard R. Trask. Harper & Row, Publishers: Harper Torchbooks, 1975 c1963. [vi], 212p. (World Perspectives, v.31). Contains bibliographical footnotes. Myths and Fairy Tales, 1st published 1956, p.195-202. Basic Bibliography p.203-204. World Perspectives p.207-212.  #9552 4.00

BL310.B8 2006   Bulfinch, Thomas, 1796-1867.  Bulfinch’s mythology.  With an introduction and notes by Charles Martin.  Barnes & Noble Classics, 2006. xxxii, 889p.  Index and dictionary.  #5025r  15.00

BL310.F72 1964   Frazer, James George, Sir, 1854-1941.  The new Golden bough: a new abridgement of the classic work.  Edited, and with notes and foreword, by Theodore H. Gaster.  New American Library: Mentor, 1964 c1959.  832p.  Notes at ends of sections.  Index.  #7202  7.37

BL310.H3 1953  Hamilton, Edith.   Mythology.  New American Library: Mentor, 1953 c1942.  335p., illus., geneal. charts, index.  #52  .50B

BL310.L4   Lang, Andrew, 1844-1912. Myth, ritual and religion. Random House UK/Senate, 1996; ist published 1906 & 1913. 2v. (         ; viii,380p.) Have v.2.  #10027 2.90

BL311.B54 1994   Bierlein, J. F. Parallel myths. The Ballantine Publishing Group: Ballantine Wellspring, c1994. xiv, 252p. Acknowledgements p.xi. Notes p.327-332. Bibliography p.333-337. Index.  #9627 16.00

BL311.C27 v.1 1987  Campbell, Joseph.   The masks of God: Primitive mythology.  Penguin Books, 1987 c1969.  504p., Reference Notes p.473-488, index.  #442.  10.60

BL311 .C27 v.2 1987  Campbell, Joseph.   The masks of God: Oriental mythology.  Penguin Books, 1987 c1962.  561p., Reference Notes p.519. 539, index.  #431  8.43

BL311.C27 v.3 1987  Campbell, Joseph.   The masks of God: Occidental mythology.  Penguin Books, 1987 c1964.  564p., Reference Notes, 527. 535, index.  #432  (gift)

BL311.C27 v.4 1987  Campbell, Joseph.   The masks of God: creative mythology.  Penguin Books, 1987 c1968.  730p., Reference Notes p.681. 710, index.  #433  (gift)

BL311.K55 1973   Kirk, G(eoffrey) S(tephen) 1931-2003. Myth: its meaning & functions in ancient and other cultures. Cambridge University Press/University of California Press, 1973 c1970. xii, 299p. (Sather Classical Lectures, v.40). Footnotes contain bibliographical references. Abbreviations p.ix-x. Index. #16258 2.15

BL311.M85 1960   Myth and mythmaking.  Edited and with an introduction by Henry A. Murray.  Braziller, 1960.  381p.  Bibliographical footnotes.  #1533  .50

BL311.M87 1961   Mythologies of the ancient world.  Edited and with introduction by Samuel Noah Kramer.  With contributions by Rudolf Anthes and others.  Doubleday & Company: Anchor Books, c1961.  480p.  Bibliographical References at Ends of sections.  Index.  Contents: Ancient Egypt.  Sumer and Akkad.  Hitte.  Canaanite.  Ancient Greece.  India.  Ancient Iran.  Ancient China.  Japan.  #13127  .25

BL311.N43 1968 Ref   New Larousse encyclopedia of mythology.  New ed.  Introduction by Robert Graves.  Prometheus Press, 1968.  500p., illus., photos (part color), Further Reading p.486-487, index.  #908  11.00

BL313.L37 1990  Larsen, Stephen.   The mythic imagination: your quest for meaning through personal mythology.  Bantam, 1990.  395p., illus., notes, bibl. p.360-372.  #493  12.41

BL313.R263 1964   Rank, Otto, 1884-1939.  The myth of the birth of the hero and other writings.  Edited by Philip Freund.  Random House: Vintage Books, 1964.  315p., xv.  The myth of the birth of the hero, translated by F. Robbins & Smith Ely Jeliffe, 1914.  I-VII from Art and artist, translated by Charles Francis Atkinson, 1932.  VIII & XI from Modern education, translated by Mabel E. Moxon, 1932.  IX from Will therapy and X from Truth and reality, translated by Jessie Taft, 1936.  #7164  .95

BL315.C27 1988  Campbell, Joseph.   Myths to live by.  Frwd. by Johnson E. Fairchild.  Bantam Books, 1988 c1972.  287p., Reference Notes p.276-279, index.  #430  5.25

BL315.E45 1990   Eliot, Alexander, 1919-      The universal myths: heroes, gods, tricksters and others. With contributions by Joseph Campbell and Mircea Eliade. Meridian, c1990; rev. ed. of c1976. x, 258p. Select Bibliography p.237-241. Index.  #9716 14.95

BL315.M87 1972   Mythology: selected readings.  Edited by Pierre Maranda.  Penguin Books, 1972.  320p., statistical tables, diagrams, references at ends of articles.  Further Reading p.299-309.  (Penguin Modern Sociology Readings).  Index.  #7507  .85

BL325.H46R3 1956   Raglan, Fitzroy Richard Somerset, 4th baron, 1885-      The hero, a study of myth, tradition, and drama.  Vintage, 1956; 1st published 1936.  296, xip.  Bibliography p.293-296.  #5101  .25

BL425.P36 1996 Ref   Panati, Charles.  Sacred origins of profound things.  Penguin Group: Arkana, c1996.  xi, 594p., illus. with engravings & woodcut reprints.  References and Reading p.571-575.  Index.  #6.40  #12128

BL430.A76 2006   Armstrong, Karen, 1944-      The great transformation: the beginning of our religious traditions. Alfred A. Knopf, c2006. xviii, 469p., maps, plans, statistical tables. [List of] Maps and Plans p.7. Acknowledgements p.9. Notes p.401-426. Glossary p.427-433. Bibliography p.435-446. Index. #13862 7.05

BL438.H3 1962   Hawkes, Jacquetta.  Man and the sun.  Random House, 1962.  277p.  Index.  #5420  .30

BL458.H45 2002   Her voice, her faith: women speak on world religions. Arvind Sharma, Katherine K. Young, Editors. Perseus Books Group: Westview Press, c2003. viii, 327p. Notes p.283-296. Bibliography p.297-306. About the Contributors p.307-309. Index.  #14005 2.55

BL458.S76 1943   Stone, Merlin.  When God was a woman.  Barnes & Noble Books, 1993 c1976.  xxvii, 265p., maps.  Date Charts p.242-245.  Bibliography p.246-257.  #11127  .55

BL460.K6 1992   Knight, Richard Payne, 1750-1824.  A history of phallic worship: a discourse on the worship of Priapus [and] The worship of the generative powers, by Thomas Wright.  Dorset Press, 1992.  2v. in 1 (217, 196p.)  Bibliographical footnotes.  #1840  2.10

BL473.A75 2009   Armstrong, Karen. The case for God. Alfred A. Knopf c2009. xviii, 411p. Acknowledgements p.331-332. Notes p.333-368. Glossary p.369-377. Bibliography p.379-390. Index. Permissions & Acknowledgements p.407. A Note about the Author p.409-410.  #14273 gift

BL473.N44 2009   Needleman, Jacob. What is God? Penguin Group: Jeremy Tarcher, c2009. [xiv], 243p. Acknowledgements p. [xi-xii]. Notes p.229-232. Index. About the Author p.243.  #14327 7.50

BL475.B3 1987   Baigent, Michael; Leigh, Richard and Lincoln, Henry.  The messianic legacy.  Henry Holt, 1987, c1986.  364p., photos, maps.  Bibliography p.327-334.  #5167  .55

BL477.D3 1971 Ref   Davidson, Gustav,     -1971.  A dictionary of angels, including the fallen angels.  Macmillan: Free Press, 1971 c1967.  386p., illus., tables, Appendix p.333-362.  Bibliography p.362-386.  #1785  2.87

BL504.D8 1973   Dunne, John S., 1929-2013. The city of the gods: a study in myth and mortality. The Macmillan Company, 1973 c1965. xii, 243p. Notes at ends of chapters. Index.  #10254 2.65

BL530.M58 1971   Montagu, Ashley.  Immortality, religion, and morals.  Hawthorn Books, Inc., c1971.  [xi], 176p.  Notes at ends of chapters.  Index.  #11629  4.80

BL540.H45 1989  Heinberg, Richard.  Memories and visions of paradise: exploring the universal myth of a lost  golden age.  Frwd by Roger Williams Wescott.  Jeremy P. Tarcher, 1989.  282p., illus., notes p.257-270, index.  #1043  3.17

BL560.R93 2008   Ryan, Thomas, 1961-       Interreligious prayer: a Christian guide. Paulist Press c2008. viii, 85p. Contains Biblical references. Appendix: Some Sources p.51-78. Notes p.79-85.  #14274 gift

BL603.C66 1978 Ref   Cooper, Jean Campbell, 1905-1999. An illustrated encyclopaedia of traditional symbols. With 120 illustrations. Thames and Hudson c1978. 209p. frontispiece, illus. Acknowledgements p.9. glossary p.201-203. Bibliography p.203-209. Illustration Acknowledgements p.208.  #15855 1.00

BL610.A6 1975   Angus, Samuel, 1881-1943. The mystery-religions: a study in the religious background of early Christianity. 2nd ed. Dover Publications, Inc., 1975; published 1925 as The mystery-religions and Christianity. xviii, 359p. Contains bibliographical footnotes. Selected Bibliography of Modern Writers p.315-332. Selected List of Chief Relevant Ancient Authors p.332-350. Addenda to Bibliography p.351-352. Indexes.  #7028 3.65

BL624.B34 1991  Baldwin, Christina.  Life’s companion: journal writing as a spiritual quest.  Illus. by Susan Boulet.  Bantam Books, 1991 c1990.  352p., il.  #1149  Review

BL624.C65 1981   The common experience.  Edited by John Michael Cohen and John-Francis Phipps.  J.P. Tarcher; distributed by Houghton Mifflin, 1981 c1979.  263p.  Bibliography p.257-261.  Index of Passages Quoted.  #5917  1.00

BL624.F683 2006   Fox, Matthew, 1940-      A new reformation; creation spirituality and the transformation of Christianity.  Inner Traditions, c2006.  xii, 134p.  Acknowledgements p.xi.  Suggested Bibliography p.127-129.  Resources p.130-131.  About the Author p.132-134.   #13515  13.95

BL624.F69 1979   Fox, Matthew, 1940-      A spirituality named compassion and the healing of the global village, Humpty Dumpty and us. Winston Press, c1979. [vi], viii, 285p. Notes p.271-285.  #14118 .40

BL624.T56 2007   Tippett, Krista. Speaking of faith. Viking c2007. xvi, 238p. Acknowledgements p.ix-xi. #13903 11.00

BL625.C64 1990   Coles, Robert.  The spiritual life of children.  Houghton Mifflin: A Peter Dawson Book, 1990.  358p., color drawings.  Notes p.339-351.  Index.  #1410  3.42

BL625.M29 1964  Marechal, Joseph.  Studies in the psychology of the mystics.   Translated with an introductory foreword by Algar Thorald.  Magi Books, 1964; 1st pub. 1927.  344p., notes at ends of chapters.  #1113  2.13

BL625.5.H93 1990   Hyde, Kenneth Edwin.  Religion in childhood and adolescence: a comprehensive review of the research.  Religious Education Press, c1990.  529p.  Statistical tables.  Appendices p.336-396.  Glossary p.397-3999.  References p.400-483.  Indexes.  #12184  1.05

BL628.H68 1995   Housden, Roger.  Retreat: time apart for silence & solitude.  HarperCollinsPublishers: Harper San Franciso, c1995.  [iv], 218p., color illus.  Addresses p.203-209.  Bibliography p.210-211.  Index.  Produced by Labyrinth Publishing (UK) Ltd.  Eesigng by DW Design.  #12861  .15

BL628.5.H47 2013   Hering, Karen. Writing to wake the soul: opening sacred conversation within. Simon & Schuster, Inc: Atria Books/Beyond Words Publishing, c2013. xxiv, 280p. Acknowledgements p.229-232. Appendices: A, Tips for Leading Groups p.233-250. B, Additional Resources p.251-254. Notes p.255-273. Contributors p.275-279/  #15747 20.00

BL690.R46 2000   Religions of late antiquity in practice. Richard Volantasis, Editor. Princeton University Press, c2000. xi, 511p. (Princeton Readings in Religion, 6). Contributors p.xv-xvi. General Bibliography p.13-15. Contains other bibliographical references at ends of readings. Index.  #14493 3.20

BL722.G7 1962   Grant, Michael.  Myths of the Greeks and Romans.  New American Library: Mentor, 1962.  432p., plates, genealogies, maps.  Notes for Further Reading p.395-401.  Index.  #7165  .95

BL722.R4 1972   Reinhold, Meyer, 1909-2002. Past and present: the continuity of classical myths. Drawings by Anna Held Audette. Hokkert, c1972. xii, 452p., drawings maps. Drawings p.xi-xii. Twentieth Century Writers and Classical Myths p.399-415. Bibliography p.417-422. Indexes. Maps p.450-452.  #9811 9.50

BL740.B66 2006   Bonfante, Larissa and Swaddling, Jadith. Etruscan myths. British Museum Press and University of Texas Press, c2006. 80p., photos, engravings, drawings, map. (The Legendary Past). The Etruscan Pantheon p.71-78. Suggestions for Further Reading p.79. Picture Credits p.79. Index.  #13679 7.45

BL781.G77 1955  Graves, Robert, 1895-1985.   The Greek myths.  Penguin, 1955.  2v. (370, 412p.), map, bibl. & notes with text, index.  #51, 52  1.90

BL781.G8 1968   Guthrie, William Keith Chambers, 1906-       The Greeks and their gods.  Beacon Press, 1968; corrected 1954; 1st published c1950.  xiv, 288p.  Contains bibliographical footnotes.  General Index p.375-387.  Index of Greek Words p.388.  #13228  .80

BL782.B8313 1985   Burkert, Walter, 1931-    Greek religion.  Translated by John Raffan.  Harvard University Press, c1985; ist published c1977as Griechische Religion der archaischen und klassichen Epoche.  ix, 493p.  Bibliography p.473-478.  Indexes.  #12327  8.00

BL782.K413 1981   Kerényi, Karl, 1897-1973.  The heroes of the Greeks.  Translated from the German by H. J. Rose.  Thames and Hudson, 1981 c1959; 1st published as Die Heroender Griechen.  xxiv, 439p., illus.  Genealogies A-K p.363-378.  List of the Kings of Athens up to the Trojan War p.380.  Sources p.381-412.  Indexes: Names and Epithets p.413-425; Places and General Subjects p.426-439.  #13239  1.60

BL782.K57 2009   Kirk, G(eoffrey) S(tephen) 1932-2003.   The nature of Greek myths. Foreword by Richard Stoneman. Barnes & Noble, c2009; first published c1974. xii, 276p.  (Barnes & Noble Rediscovers). Selected Bibliography p.259-260. Abbreviations Used in the Notes p.261. Notesp.262-267. Index. #1479r  5.30

BL785.H4 1960   Harrison, Jane Ellen, 1850-1928.  Prolegomena to the study of Greek religion.  3rd ed.  Meridian Books, Inc. c1960; 1st published 1903.  xxii, 682p, drawings.  Bibliographical footnotes.  Critical Appendix on the Orphic Tablets p.659-673.  Indexes.  #12502  .50

BL785.H45 1977   Harrison, Jane Ellen, 1850-1928. Themis: a study of the social origin of Greek religion. With an excursus on the ritual forms preserved in Greek tragedy by Gilbert Murray and a chapter on the origin of the Olympic Games by F. M. Cornford. Merlin Press, 1977 c1963. xxxviii, 559p., photos, drawings, maps. Contains bibliographical footnotes. Addenda and Corrigenda p.xxxv-xxxvi. Index.  #3617 7.35

BL805.A63 2000   Anderson, Graham. Fairy tale in the ancient world. Taylor & Francis Group: Routledge, c2000. xii, 240p. List of Abbreviations p.xi. Notes p.195-219. Bibliography p.220-227. Index of Folktale Types p.228-229. General Index. #10391 26.35

BL820.B2E9 1988  Evans, Arthur.   The god of ecstasy: sex roles and the madness of Dionysius.  St. Martin’s Press: Stonewall InnEditions, 1988.  286p., photos, bibl., index. #471  9.53

BL820.M6S43 1998   Shearer, Ann. Athene: image and energy. Penguin Books: Arkana, 1998 c1996. x, 310p., photos. List of Illustrations Acknowledgements p.viii. August Lady [nams] p.x. Notes p.274-286. Bibliography p.287-297. Acknowledgements p.298-301. Index. #9909 6.50

BL820.O7G8 1993   Guthrie, William Keith Chambers.  Orpheus and Greek religion: a study of the orphic movement.  With 16 plates and 19 text illustrationsPrinceton University Press, c1993 preface; 1st published c1952.  xl, 291p.  Bibliography p.275-278.  Indexes.  #10730  5.35

BL850.R67 2000 Ref   Rossman, Douglas Athon, 1936-   The nine worlds: a dictionary of Norse mythology.  Illustrated by Sharon Rossman.  2nd ed, rev. & exp.  Skandisk, Inc., c2000; 1st published 1983.  112p. illus, photo.  Yggdrasil, The World Tree, unites the Nine Worlds p.108.  Introduction, p.18-20, contains bibliographical references.  Drengskapur: Heroic Code of the Viking Age p.112.  #13472  6.35

BL860.C63 1996   Colum, Padraic, 1881-1972.  Nordic gods and heroes.  With illustrations by Willy Pogany.  Dover Publications, 1996; 1st published 1920 as The children of Odin.  ix, 282p., drawings.  #8095  9.95

BL860.C76 1980  Crossley-Holland, Kevin.   The Norse myths.  Introd. and retold.  Pantheon Books, 1980.  276p., drawings, notes p.181-236, gloss., bibl. p.254-261.  #444.  10.60

BL860.D36 1973  Davidson, H. R. Ellis.   Gods and myths of northern Europe.  Penguin Books, 1973 c1964.  251p., names and sources p.227-240, index.  #951  .26

BL860.L56 2002 Ref   Lindow, John.  Norse mythology: a guide to the gods, heroes, rituals, and beliefs.  Oxford University Press, 20002 c2001.  xv, 365p., black & white photos.  Print and Nonprint Resources p.327-340.  First published as Handbook of Norse Mythology.  #12132  15.20

BL860.T5 2001   Thorpe, Benjamin, 1782-1820.  Northern mythology: from pagan faith to local legends.  Compiled from original and other sources…  With an introduction by Jacqueline Simpson.  Wordsworth Editions in Association with The Folklore Society, c2001; 1st published 1851-1852.  xvi, 683p.  Abbreviations and References p.xii-xiv.  Index.  #11829  3.75

BL900.M445 1998 Ref   MacKillop, James. Dictionary of Celtic mythology. Oxford University Press c1998. xxx, 402p. Select Bibliography p.383-395. Subject Index.  #13811 2.65

BL900.S483 1982   Sjoestedt, Marie-Louise.  Gods and heroes of the Celts.  Translated by Myles Dillon.  Turtle Island Foundation, 1994 c1982; 1st published 1940 as Dieux et Héros des Celtes.  131p.  Bibliography p.115-119.  #5292  3.20

BL900.S57 1996   Spence, Lewis, 1875-1955.  The magic arts in Celtic Britain.  Newcastle Publishing, 1996.  198p., photos, drawings.  List of Works Consulted p.183-184.  Index.  #1957  4.30

BL910.E45 1994   Ellis, Peter Beresford.  The druids.  William B. Eerdmans Publishing Company, c1994.  304p.  Contains bibliographical references.  Select Bibliography p.282-292.  Index.    #13527  1.10

BL1060.R438 1989 Ref   Religions of antiquity. Edited by Robert M. Seltzer. Macmillan Publishing Company c1989. xii, 306p. Bibliographies at ends of entries. On cover: Religion, history and culture selected from The Encyclopedia of Religion, Mircea Eliade, Editor in Chief.  #15821 3.20

BL1112.52.E53 1992   Vedas.  Rigveda.  English.  Hinduism: the Rig Veda.  Translated by Ralph T. H. Griffith.  Book of the Month Club, 1992; reprint of improved edition, 1896; 1st published 1889.  xii, 656p.  #8088  5.35

BL1120.A3M78 1962   The upanisads.  Translated by F. Max Muller.  Dover, 1962; 1st published 1879, 1884.  2pts. (ci, 320; xii, 350p.), alphabets, bibliographical footnotes (The sacred books of the East, v.I, XV)  #1769, 8094  14.24

BL1125.A3D6 1991   Manu (Lawgiver).   The laws of Manu. With an introduction and notes. Translated by Wendy Doniger with Brian K. Smith. Penguin Books, 2000 c1991. lxxviii, 362p. Acknowledgements p. xiii. History of the Text p.xvi-xlv. The Structure and Meaning of the Text p.xliv-lxi. The Translation plxi-lxxvii. Bibliographyp.291-300. Index and Glossary p.301-362. #16107 3.50

BL1135.P6213 1978   Puranas.  English.  Selections.  Classical Hindu mythology: a reader in the Sanskrit Puranas.  Edited & translated by Cornelia Dimmitt and J.A.B. van Buitenen.  Temple University press, 1978.  373p.  Glossary p.351-359.  Bibliography of Sanskrit Puranas p.365.  Index.  1, Origins.  2, Visnu.  3., Krsna.  4, Siva.  5, The goddess.  6, Seers, kings and supernaturals.  #7451  5.30

BL1138.242.S28E5   Mahabharata.  Sautikaparvan.  English.  The Sautikaparvan of the Mahabharata: the massacre at night.  Translated with an introduction and ntoes by W. J. Johnson.  Oxford University Press, c1998.  xlviii, 140p.  Select Bibliography p.xlii-xlv.  Appendix:  The Mahabharata: a book by book summary of the principal episodes p.87-104.  Proper Names and Epithehts p.133-140.  #11643  5.25

BL1138.62.E5 1972   Bhagavad-gitaThe bhagavad gita.  Translated and interpreted by Franklin Edgerton.  Harvard University Press, c1972 renewal of c1944; 1st published as v.38 & 39 of the Harvard Oriental Series.  xv, 202p.  Notes on the Bibliography and Exegesis of the Gita p.xiii-xv.  Bibliographical footnotes.  Indexes.  #12112  .25

BL1138.62E5 1988  Bhagavad-gita.   Krishna’s counsel in time of war.  A translation by Barbara Stoler Miller.  Bantam Books, 1988 c1986.  169p., keywords p.162-168.  #490  4.19

BL1220.K54 1977   Kinsley, David R.  The sword and the flute: Kali and Krsna, dark visions of the terrible and the sublime in Hindu mythology.  University of California Press, 1977 c1975.  viii, 168p.  Works Cited p.161-168.  #12252  gift

BL1405.B8 1963   Buddhism.  Edited by Richard Agard.  Washington Square Press, 1963.  252p.  Index.  #5031  1.05 BL1405.D4 1972   Buddhist tradition in India, China & Japan.  Ed. by William Theodore de Bary, with the collabora.  tion of Yoshito Hakeda and Philip Yompolsky and with contributions.  Random House: Vintage, 1972 c1969.  417p., Bibl. p.399-401, index.  #1051   3.19

BL1410.T33 1963   The teachings of the compassionate Buddha.  Edited, with introduction and notes by Edwin A. Burtt.  New American Library: Mentor Religious Classic, 1963 c1955.  247p.  Bibliography p.2420243.  Glossary p.244-247.  The best translations of basic texts.  Some basic tdoctrines of the Buddha.  Teaching the path to Nirvana.  The spirit of Theravada Buddhism.  The Mahayana religious ideal.  Some Makayana philosophies.  Devotional and institutional Buddhism in China and Japan.  #9117  3.75

BL1420.H8 1964   Humphreys, Christmas, 1901-       Buddhism.  3d ed.  Penguin Books, 1964 c1962.  256p., photos.  Bibliography at ends of chapters.  Glossary p.242-246p.  General Bibliography p.247-252.  Index.  #9118  3.75

BL1615.K73 1997   Kramer, Samuel Noah, 1897-1990. Sumerian mythology: a study of spiritual and literary achievement in the third millennium B.C. Rev. ed. University of Pennsylvania Press, 1997 c1972; 1st published 1944. xxii, 130p., photos, drawings. Contains bibliographical references. List of Illustrations p.ix. Notes p.104-123. Index. #9594 13.85

BL1616.I5I53 1983   Inanna, queen of heaven and earth: her stories and hymns from Sumer.  Diane Walkstein and Samuel Noah Kramer.  Art compiled by Elizabeth Williams Forte.  Harper & Row, c1983.  xix, 227p., photos, drawings, map.  Commentaries p.113-207.  Selected Bibliography p.209-212.  Acknowledgements p.213.  Index.  #12277  6.35

BL1620.M98 1989   Myths from Mesopotamia: creation, the flood, Gilgamesh, and others.  Translated with an introduction and notes by Stephanie Dolley.  Oxford University Press, 1989.  337p.  Glossary p.317-331.  Select Bibliography p.332-337.  #1789  6.42

BL1852.S55 2000   Simpkins, C. Alexander and Simpkins, Annellen.  Simple confucianism: a guide to living virtuously.  Tuttle Publishing, c2000.  x, 140, [ii]p., photos.  Time Line p.1310136.  Bibliography p.137-140.  #12581  3.00

BL1900.L3C35 1974   Laozi, fl. 6th century BCE. The canon of reason and virtue (Lao-tze’s Tao Teh-King) Chinese and English. Translated by D.T.Suzuki & Paul Carus. Open Court, 1974; reprint of 1964 ed.; 1st published 1913. 209p. Sze-ma Ch’ien on Lao-tze p.69-71. The Old Philsopher’s Canon of Reason and Virtue p.73-130. Comments and Alternative Readings p.131-187. Table of References p.189-206. Index. #15737 1.10

BL2001.N6 1994   Nivedita, Sister, 1867-1911 and Commaraswamy, Ananda K.  Hindus and Buddhists.  Studio Editions: Senate, 1994.  426p., illus.  Glossary & Index p.401-426.  #1400  5.33

BL2001.2H56 1987  Hindu myths: a sourcebook.   Tr. from the Sanskrit.  Introd. by Wendy Doniger O’Flaherty.  Penguin Books, 1987 c1975.  358p., appendices, gloss. & index of names.  #450.  6.31

BL2003.I6 1967   Ions, Veronica.  Indian mythology.  Paul Hamlyn, 1967.  141p., illus., colored front.  Further Reading p.140.  Index.  #1396  gratis

BL2003.Z5 1962   Zimmer, Heinrich Robert, 1890-1943.  Myths and symbols in Indian art and civilization.  Edited by Joseph Campbell.  Harper & Row: Harper Torchbooks/The Bollingen Library, 1962 c1946.  xiii, 248p.  70 plages.  Bilbiographical footnotes.  Index.  #11585  5.90

BL2012.M387 1997   McLeod, W. Hew.  Sikhism.  Penguin Books, c1997.  xxxiii, 334p.  Appendix: Translated from the Scriptures p.269-301.  Reference Citations p.315-316.  Bibliographical notes p.317-325.  Index.  #11773  6.40

BL2017.T49 1990   Textual sources for the study of Sikhism. Edited and translated by W.H. McLeod. The University of Chicago Press, 1990 c1984. x, 166p., map (Textual Sources for the Study of Religion). Acknowledgements p.ix. Notes p.147-159. Bibliography p.159-160. Glossary p.161-163. Index.  #13647 3.00

BL2018.5.G85S55 1990   Sikh religion. Sikh Missionary Society, c1990. 320p., photos. ‘The purpose of this book is to spread the doctrine of Sikhism as laid down by the Gurus.’ Selections from the ten Gurus and Guru Granth Sahib. A Brief Outline of Sikh Fundamentals p.270-311. Bibliography p.312. Appendix [glossary] p.313-320.  #15719 .35

BL2525.M423 2006   Meacham, John. God, the founding father, and the making of a nation. Random House, c2006. xii, 399p., front. illus. Bibliography p.359-387. Author’s Note and Acknowledgements p.389-399.  #13564 18.25

BL2525.M6513 2007   Monda, Antonio, 1962-      Do you believe: conversations on God and religion. Translated from the Italian by Ann Goldstein. Random Huse, Inc.: Vintage Books, c2007; 1st published as Tu Credi? c2006. xii, 178p. #15026 2.15

BL2340.R44 1974   Religious life and communities.  Keter Books, 1974.  214p., photos.  Bibliography p.201-204 (Israel Pocket Library)  Originally published in Encyclopedia Judaica.  #5243  .50

BL2400.K72 1995 Ref   Knappert, Jan. African mythology: an encyclopedia of myth and legend. Illustrated by Elizabeth Knappert. Diamond Books, 1995; 1st published as The Aquarian Guide to African Mythology c1990. 272p. drawings. A Note on Sources p.17-18. Bibliography p.270-272.  #13090 1.05

BL2400.M38 1970   Mbiti, John S.  African religions and philosophy.  Doubleday: Anchor Books, 1970 c1969.  xvi, 384p.  Select Bibliography p.364-371.  Indexes.  #8057  .20

BL2441.S47 1999   Seton-Williams, Marjorie Veronica, 1910-        Egyptian legends and stories.  Barnes & Noble Books, 1999 c1988.  vi, 137p., drawings, map.  Bibliogrpahy p.131.  Glossary p.132-134.  Index.  #11457  6.40

BL2441.3.O9 2003 Ref   The Oxford essential guide to Egyptian mythology.  Edited by Donald B. Redford.  Berkley Books, 2003 c2002.  Published originally as The Ancient gods speak: a guide to Egyptian religion.  viii, 405p., photos, drawings.  Works Cited p.383-386.  Further Reading p.387-389.  Index.  #12624  8.60

BL2525.C637 1993   Carter, Stephen L, 1954-    The culture of disbelief: how American law and politics trivialize religious devotion.  Basic Books, 1993.  328p.  Bibliographical Notes p.279-318.  Index.  #1599  4.79

BL2525.K67 1993   Kosmin, Barry A. and Lachman, Seymour P.  One nation under God: religion in contemporary American society.  Harmony Books, c1993.  [v], 312p., maps, graphs, statistical tables.  Bibliography [by chapter] p.302-308.  Index.  #12708  1.10

BL2525.M37   Marty, Martin E., 1928-       Modern American religion. The University of Chicago Press c1986-         v. (xi, 386;      p.) photos. Notes p.321-367. Index. v.1: The irony of it all, 1893-1919.  #14073 10.65

BL2525.M423 2006   Meacham, John.  American Gospel: God, the founding fathers, and the making of a nation.  Random House, c2006.  xii, 399p., frontispiece, illus.  Bibliography p.359-387.  Author’s Note and Acknowledgements p.389-399.   #13564  18.25

BL2525.N48 1984   Neuhaus, Richard John.  The naked public square: religion and democracy in America.  William B. Eerdmans Publishing Company, c1984.  viii, 280p.  End Notes p.265-275.  Index.  #12964  1.00

BL2525.S55 1988  Silk, Mark.   Spiritual politics: religion and America since World War II.  Simon & Schuster, 1988.  206p., notes p.183-195, index.  #448.  4.22

BL2530.U6H8 1973 Ref   Hudson, Winthrop H.  Religion in America: an historical account of the development of A merican religious life.  2d ed.  Charles Scribner’s Sons 1973.  463p.  Suggestions for Further Reading p.442-444.  Index.  #1462  1.00

BL2530.U6D5   A documentary history of religion in America.  Edited by Edwin S. Gaustad2d ed.  Eerdmans, 1993.  2v.  v.1, To the Civil War.  #5526  .50

BL2725.S6 1986   Ingersoll, Robert G., 1833-1899. Some mistakes of Moses. Prometheus Books, 1986; 1st published 1879. xii, 13-290p.  #9604 1.05

BL2746.6.N67 2004   Norman, Richard J          , Taylor & Francis Group. On humanism. Routledge, c1004. 170p. (Thinking in Action). Acknowledgements Notes p.161-166 Index. #16113 2.15

BL2760.J33 2004   Jacoby, Susan.  Freethinkers: a history of American secularism.  Henry Holt and Company: Metropolitan Books, c2004.  xii, 417p.  Notes p.371-388.  Selected Bibliography p.389-398.  Acknowledgement p.319-341.  Index.   #13401  5.95

BL2775.2.S913 1961   Szczesny, Gerhard. The future of unbelief. Translated from the German by Edward B. Garsick. George Braziller c1961; 1st published as Die Zukunft des Unglaubens. 221p.  #13996 2.15

BL2775.3.D39 2006   Dawkins, (Clinton) Richard, 1941-      The god delusion. Houghton Mifflin Company c2006. x, 406p. A Partial List of Friendly Addresses, for individuals needing support in escaping from religion p.375-379. Books Cited or Recommended p.380-387. Notes p.388-399. Index.  #15863 2.15

BL2775.3.H37 2004   Harris, Sam. The end of faith: religion, terror, and the future of reason. [With a new afterword]. W. W. Norton & Company, c2004. 348p., tables. Notes p.239-301. Bibliography p.303-331. Acknowledgements p.333. Index. #14321 15.60

BL2780.R87 1957   Russell, Bertrand, 3d Earl Russell, Viscount Amberley, 1872-1970.  Why I am not a Christian and other essays on religion and related subjects.  Edited with an appendix on the “Bertrand Russell Case” by Paul Edwards.  Simon & Schuster: Clarion, 1957.  266p.  #1647  .25

BM43.J83 1962   Judaism. Edited by Arthur Hertzberg. George Braziller, 1962 c1961. 256p. References p.247-256. #10148 1.10

BM45.R672 1998   Rosenzwig, Franz, 1886-1929. God, man, and the world: lectures and essays. Edited and translated from the German by Barbara E. Galli. With a foreword by Michael Oppenheim. Syracuse University Press, c1998. xxxv, 152p. Contains bibliographical notes. Acknowledgements p.ix. Index.  #9451 1.00

BM157.N47 1992   Neuser, Jacob, 1932-      An introduction to Judaism: a textbook and reader.  Westminster/John Knox Press, c1991.  xvi, 476p.  Notes after chapters.  Glossary p.447-471.  Index.  #11200  3.95

BM176.R8 1977   Russell, David Syme.  Between the testaments.  rev. ed.  Fortress Press, 1977 c1965; 1st published c1960.  176p.  A Select Bibliography p.163-164.  Rulers and Events p.165-166.  Indexes.  #12104  1.10

BM195.M6 1977   Modern Jewish thought: a source reader.  Edited by Nahum N. Glatzer.  Schocken Books, 1977.  xiii, 240p.  Selected Bibliography p.215-231.  Index.  #7203  .95é

BM390.A69 2000   Armstrong, Karen, 1944-       The battle for God. Knopf: A Borzoi Book, c2000. xvi, 443p. Glossary p.369-379. Notes p.381-408. Bibliography p.409-424. Acknowledgements p.423. Index. About the Author p.443.  #10105 3.00

BM487.A3V4 1997 Ref   Dead Sea Scrolls. English. The complete Dead Sea scrolls in English [translated from the Hebrew and Aramaic and edited by] Géza Vermes. Penguin Books c1997; 1st published as The Dead Sea scrolls in English c1962. xx, 648p. maps, chronology. Contains bibliographical references. Scroll Catalogue p.601-619. Index of Qumran Texts p.620-622. Major Editions of Qumran Manuscripts p.628-630. General Bibliography p.631-633. General Index.  #9865 20.20

BM487.A3W57 1996 Ref   Wise, Michael; Abegg, Martin; and Cook, Edward.  The Dead Sea scrolls: a new translation.  HarperSanFrancisco, 1996.  513p.  Bibliography p.494-503.  Indexes.  #5253  3.45

BM487.B78 1986   Burrows, Millar.   Dead sea scrolls.  With translations by the author.  Gramercy Publishing, 1986.  435p., bibl. p.419-435.  #934  9.56

BM487.D42 2000   Deasley, Alex R. G.  The shape of Qumran theology.  Paternoster press, c2000.  xiv, 341p.  Abbreviations p.xiii-xiv.  Notes at ends of chapters.  Author Index p.327-331.  Subject Index p.332-341.  #13583  2.15

BM487.D422 2010 Ref   Dead Sea scrolls and the Bible: ancient artifacts, timeless treasures. Milwaukee Public Museum c2010. 68p. photos, facsimilies.  #14179 10.50

BM487.G65 1995   Golb, Norman.  Who wrote the Dead Sea scrolls?  The search for the secret of Qumran.  Scribner, 1995.  446p., photos, map, facsimilies.  Selected Bibliography p.423-431. Index.  #5044  6.40

BM487.U49 1992   Understanding the Dead Sea Scrolls: A reader from the Biblical Archaeology Review. Edited by Herschel Shanks. Random House, c1992. xxxviii, 337p. photos, facsimilies, plans. Acknowledgements p.vii-viii. Illustrations and Charts p.xiii-xiv. On Caves and Scholars p.ix-xxx. Notes p.290-311. About the Authors p.313-315. Index. Sources and Dates of Original Articles p.337. #16347 1.70

BM487.W5 1975   Wilson, Edmund, 1895-1972.  The Dead Sea scrolls, 1947-1969.  Collins Fontana Library, 1975 c1969; rev. & exp. from The Scrolls from the Dead Sea, 1955.  312p., index.  #7204  .25

BM496.6.N48 2005   Neusner, Jacob, 1932-2016. Rabbinic literature: an essential guide. Abingdon Press, c2005. [vi], 164p. Notes p.150-162. Appendix p.163-164. #16478 3.25

BM506.A2 E5 1959   Aboth.  English.   The living Talmud, the wisdom of the fathers and its classical commentaries.  New American Library, 1957.  247p.  #97  Index of Sages, p.244  .50

BM532.B7613 1991   Buber, Martin, 1878-1965.  Tales of the Hasidim.  Bk.1: Early masters and Bk.2: Later masters.   Schocken Books, 1991.  2v. in 1 (353, 352p.) notes, glossary, bibliography, genealogy, indexes.  First published 1947.  #1037  3.81

BM535.C37 2001   Carroll, James.  Constatine’s sword: the church and the Jews.  Houghton Mifflin Company, c2001.  xii, 756p.  Chronology p.622-627.  Bibliography p.696-719.  Index.  #12388  7.00

BM535.L395 1962   Levine, Raphael H.  Two paths to one God: Judaism and Christianity.  With an introduction by the Rt. Rev. Stephen F. Bayne.  Collier Books, c1962; 1st published as Holy mountain, c1953.  256p.  Important Events in Jewish History p.237-244.  Important Events in American Jewish History p.245-246.  Bibliography p.247-249.  Index.  #10893  .25

BM536.7L49 1999   Levine, Lee I. Judaism and  Hellenism in antiquity: conflict or confluence? Hendrickson Publishers, 1999 c1998. xiv, 227p., photos, drawings, maps. (Samuel and Althea Stroum Lectures in Jewish Studies). Contains bibliographical footnotes. Abbreviations p.185-186. Bibliography p.187-207. Indexes. #14491 8.55

BM545.D3 1956   Maimonides, Moses, 1135-1204.  The guide for the perplexed.  Translated from the original Arabic text by M. Friedlander.  2d ed., rev. throughout.  Dover Publications, 1956 c1904.  lix, 414p.  The Moreh Nebuchim literature p.xxvii-xxxviii.  Indexes.  #7761  5.30

BM561.R58 2000 Ref   Robinson, George, 1953-      Essential Judaism: a complete guide to beliefs, customs, and rituals. Pocket Books, c2000. xxiv, 644p., diagrams, charts, chrnology. Notes at ends of chapters. Acknowledgements p.xix-xxi.  Appendices: 1. Some Key Documents of Contemporary Religious Belief p.505-540. 2. Timeline of Major Events p.541-550. 3. Where the Jews are Today p.551-555. 4. Jewish Holidays, 1999-2006 p.556. 5. An Orthodox Union Kosher Primer p.557-566. Glossary p.567-598. Sources and Resources p.599-617. Index.  #10106 7.95

BM561.W65 1986   Wouk, Herman.  This is my God: the Jewish way of life.   rev. ed. Simon & Schuster: Touchstone, 1986 c1970.  317p., notes p.250-97, gloss. p.300-307, Book List p.310-313.  #916  1.90

BM601.F29 1989   Fackenheim, Emil L.  To mend the world: foundations of post-holocaust thought.  With a new preface by the author.  Schocken Books, 1989.  358p.  Bibliographical footnotes and notes p.335-344. Index.  #1291  2.12

BM610.K85 1989   Kushner, Harold S(amuel) 1935-      When children ask about God: a guide for parents who don’t always have all the answers. New ed. Shocken Books, c1989; 1st published c1971. xxviii, 177p. #15782 2.15

BM657.A8 H36 1993   Hancock, Graham.  The sign and the seal: the quest for the lost Ark of the Covenant.  Simon & Schuster: Touchstone, 1993 c1992.  600p., References p.517-588, index.  #1097  13.49

BM690.A433 1965  Agnon, Shmuel Yosef.  Days of  Awe: being a treasury of traditions, legends and learned commentaries concerning Rosh Ha-Shana, Yom Kippur and the days between culled from 300 volumes…  Schocken, 1965.  297p., bibl. p.283-297.  #1029   2.86

BM700.G32 1963 Ref   Ganzfried, Solomon. Code of Jewish law: Kilzar Shulhan Aruh. A compilation of Jewish laws and customs. Annotated rev. ed. Translated by Hyman E. Goldin. Hebrew Publishing Company c1963. 4v. in 1 ( [xiv] 154, 150, 122, 138, xxiip). Notes p.1-xxxii.  #13695 1.10

BM729.B53 1984   Biale, Rachel.  Women and Jewish law: the essential texts, their history, and their relevance today.  With a new foreword by the author.  Schocken Books, c1985; 1st published c1984.  vi, 293p.  Notes p.267-283.  Halakhic Sources p.285-286.  Glossary p.287-288.  Index.  #12705  .37

BP50.A69 2000   Armstrong, Karen, 1944-      Islam: a short history. The Modern Library, c2000. xxxvi, 222p., maps (A Modern Library Chronicles Book). Chronology p.189-198. Glossary of Arabic Terms p.199-202. Notes p.203-204. Suggestions for Further Reading p.205-211. Index. #15752 3.25

BP52.K37 2006   Karsh, Efraim. Islamic imperialism: a history. Yale University Press, c2007. xii,284p. maps, genealogies, tables. Notes p.242-272. Index.  #14363 2.15

BP52.S24 1981  Said, Edward W.   Covering Islam: how the media and the experts determine how we see the rest of the world.  Pantheon Books, 1981.  186p., notes, index.  #996  3.81

BP60.E84 1999   Esposito, John L.  The Islamic threat: myth or reality?  3rd ed.  Oxford University press, c1999.  xxi, 328p.  Select Bibliography p.313-317.  Index.  #11096  16.20

BP63.A1N35 1972   Naupaul, Vidiahar Surajprasad, 1932-        Among the believers: an Islamic journey.  Random House: Vintage Books, 1982 c1981.  viii, 430p.  #11316  17.15

BP75.A391 1992   Ali, Muhammad, 1874-1951.   The living thoughts of the Prophet Muhammad.  Ahmadiyya Amjuman Isha, c1992; 1st published 1947.  vii, 156p.  #11372  5.30

BP75.A52 1960  Andrae, Tor.   Mohammed, the man and his faith.  rev. ed.  Harper: Torchbooks, 1960 c1955.  194p.  #54.  1.25 BP75.13.R613 1980.  Robinson, Maxime.  Muhammad: Tr. from the French by Anne Carter.  Pantheon Books, 1980.  362p., genealogy, maps, Arabic words & names, p.331-344, bibl. p.345-348, index.  1st pub, 1961, as Mahomet.  #1033  3.81

BP109.D3 1999  Koran.  English.  Dawood.  1999.   The Koran.  5th rev. ed., with further revision & notes.  Translated with notes by N. J. Dawood.  Penguin Books, c1999; 1st published 1956.  viii, 456p.  Index.  #11672  7.40

BP130.4.C66 2000   Cook, Michael A.  The Koran: a very short introduction.  Oxford University Press, c2000xii, 164p., photos, maps, facsimilies.  Going Further p.150-153.  Indexes.  #11376  7.25

BP130.4.S589 2008   Siddiqui, Mona. How to read the Qurian. W.W. Norton & Company, 2008, c2007. 1st published by Granta Boks. viii, 120p. (How To Series). Contains bibliographical references. Notes p.106-108. Chronology p.109-111. Suggestions for Further Reading p.112-116. Index. #16150 2.10

BP161.2.F3 1994   Farah, Eesar E.  Islam: beliefs and observances.  5th ed.  Barrons, 1984.  434p.  Glossary p.408-416.  Recommended Reading p.417-429.  #5460  12.45

BP161.2L56 1990   Lippman, Thomas W.  Understanding Islam: an introduction to the Muslim world.  Rev. ed.  A Mentor Book, c1990; 1st published 1982.  xii, 194p.  Glossary p.182-185.  Bibliography p.186-188.  Index.   #13396  .40 BP161.2.R87 2000   Ruthven, Malise.  Islam in the world.  2nd ed.  Oxford University Press, c2000; 1st published c1984.  xxi, 472p., black & white photos & engravings.  Suggestions for Further Reading p.419-424.  Glossary p.425-432.  Genealogical Tables p.433-434.  A Chronology p.436-443.  Index.  #11497  10.70

BP163.A2515 2005   Abdul Rauf, Feisal, 1948-      What’s right with Islam is what’s right with America. Foreword by Karen Armstrong. HarperCollinsPublishers: HarperSanFrancisco, 2005 c2004. xxii, 314p. Acknowledgements p.285-286. Appendix: Fatwa Permitting U.S. Muslim Military Personnel to Participate in Afghanistan War Effort p.287-291. Notes p.293-305. Index.  #13820 1.00

BP163.R46 1998   Renard, John, 1944-      Responses to 101 questions on Islam.  Paulist Press, c1998.  viii, 173p.  Suggestions for Further Reading p.159-160.  Index.  #11371  6.95

BP173.4.A47 2000   Al-Sheha, Abdul Rahman.  Women in the shade of Islam.  Rendered into English by Dr. Mohammed Said Dabas.  Introduced by Dr. Ahmad Ibn Saifuddir.  Rev. by Abdulaziz Addvesh.  3rd. ed.  Islamic Education Center? [1418] 2000; 1st published 1997 or 98.  [vii], 120, [iv]p.  #12790  1.00

BP182.A6 2010   Aslan, Reza. Beyond fundamentalism: confronting religious extremism in the age of globalization. Random House Trade Paperbacks, c2010; 1st published c2009 as How to win a cosmic war. viii, 225p. Acknowledgements p.177. Glossary p.179-181. Notes p.183-208. Select Bibliography p.209-212. Index.  #15016 1.70

BP194.185.N37 2006   Nasr, Seyyed Vali Reza, 1960-        The Shia Revival: how conflicts within Islam will shape the future. W.W. Norton & Company c2006. 288p. map. Notes p.255-268. Acknowledgementsp.269-270. Index. About the Author p.288. #16134 gift

BP595.B3 1966   Barfield, Owen.  Romanticism comes of age.  new & augumented ed.  Rudolf Steiner Books, 1966; 1st published 1944.  254p., bibliographical footnotes.  #7651  1.25

BP605.C68J353 1993   Jampolsky, Gerald G        1925-       and Cirincione, Diane V.  Change your mind, change your life: concepts in attitudinal healing.  Bantam Books, 1993.  285p.  #1839  2.87

BQ1192.E5T77 1993   Suttapitka.  English.  Selections.  The Buddha’s philosophy of man: early Indian Buddhist diagloges.  Arranged and edited by Trevor Ling.  J.M. Dent: Everyman’s Library, 1993 c1981.  xxiv, 215p., map.  Bibliography p.214-215.  #7585  1.85

BQ9294.4.J3W4713 1978   van de Wetering, Jan Willem, 1931-        Empty mirror: experiences in a Japanese Zen monastery.  Washington Square Press, 1978 c1973; 1st published, 1972 as De Lege Spiegel.  192p.  #5200  .30

BF-BJ Classification

May 7, 2014

Mind, Psychology, Ethics, and related – 692 Titles

BF1-BF76/Mind, Thought and Psychology Generally           BF81-BF833/Psychologists and Aspects of Psychology          BF103-BF1999/The Irrational: Occult, Superstition, etc.          BH/Aesthetics, The Beautiful                     BJ21-BJ2121/Ethics, Etiquette, Morality, Free Will 

Updated 17 September 2018.

BF31.O94 1987 Ref  Oxford companion to the mind.   Ed. by Richard L. Gregory with the assistance of O.L. Zangwill.  Oxford Univ. Press, 1987.  856p., illus.  Index.  #462  24.97

BF38.E9 1959   Eysenck, Hans Jurgen, 1916-      Uses and abuses of psychology.  Penguin Books, 1959 c1953.  318p.  Recommendations for Further Reading p.314.  #1263  .27

BF38.K23 2000   Kagan, Jerome, 1929-      Three seductive ideas. Harvard University Press, 2000, c1998. [viii], 232p. Notes p.203-217. Acknowledgements p.219. Index.  #14150 1.15

BF38.L55 1976   Lifton, Robert Jay.  The life of the self: toward a new psychology.  Simon & Schuster: A Touchstone Book, c1976.  190p.  Notes p.173-181.  Index.  #10417  .50

BF41.H3 1983   Hampshire, Stuart.  Thought and action.  New ed.  University of Notre Dame Press, 1983 c1982; 1st published 1959.  298p.  Index.  #12954  3.25

BF47.D55 2000   Dilman, Ilham. Roskolnikov’s rebirth: psychology and the understanding of good and evil. Open Court, c2000. xx, 214p. Acknowledgements p. xv. Bibliography p.207-210. Index. #13979 2.15

BF51.W43 1958   What, then, is man? A symposium of theology, psychology, and psychiatry.  Concordia, 1958.  356p.  Bibliography p.341-344.  Indexes.  #5188  .10

BF57.L5 1971   Lifton, Robert Jay, 1926-        History and human survival: essays on the young and old, survivors and the dead, peace and war, and on contemporary psychohistory.  Random House: Vintage Books, 1971 c1970.  viii, 404p.  Notes p.377-393.  Index.  #7577  1.00

BF67.C33 1964   Carnegie, Dale, 1888-1955.  How to win friends and influence people.  Simon & Schustr, c1964 renewed of 1st publication c1936.  vii, 246p.  Index.  #10929  .55

BF67.M39 1967   May, Rollo.  Man’s search for himself.  New American Library: Signet, 1967 c1953.  239p.  #5595  .50

BF76.5.S68 1996   Stenovich, Keith E.  How to think straight about psychology.  4th ed.  HarperCollins College Publishers, 1996.  224p.  References p.199-217.  Index.  #1908  4.25

BF81.W35 1978   Watson, Robert Irving, 1909-          The great psychologists.  4th ed.  J.B. Lippincott, 1978.  645p., bibl. ref at end of chapters  Indexes.  #1047  4.75

BF109.F74S85 1992   Sulloway, Frank J.  Freud, biologist of the mind: beyond the psychoanalytic legend.  Harvard University Press, 1992; originally published 1979.  612p.  Bibliography p.519-575.  Index.  #1188  1.07

BF109.J8A3 1965   Jung, Carl Gustave, 1875-1961.  Memories, dreams, reflections.  Rev. ed.  Recorded and edited by Aniela Jaffé.  Translated from the German by Richard and Clara Winston.  Random House: Vintage Books, 1965 c1963; 1st published as Erinnerangen Träume Gedanken.  xvi, 430p.  Appendices I-V [Letters and additional works] p.361-390.  Glossary p.391-402.  The Collected Works of C. G. Jung p.403-410.  Index.  #13440  .30

BF109.M33H63 1999   Hoffman, Edward.  The right to be human: a biography of Abraham Maslow.  Rev. and updated ed.  McGraw-Hill, 1999; 1st published 1988.  xvi, 377p., photos.  Maslow’s Publications p.325-330.  Bibliography p.331-343.  Index.  #7736  9.60

BF121.G559 1998   Glasser, William, 1925-      Choice theory: a new psychology of personal freedom. HarperCollinsPublishers, c1998. xii, 340p. Acknowledgements p. xi-xii.  #15063  5.40

BF121.G65 1975   Goodman, George W.  Powers of mind, by Adam Smith.  Random House, 1975.  xi, 418p.  Bibliography p.401-418.  #10166  .55

BF121.W43 1991   Weber, Ann L.  Introduction to psychology.  HarperCollinsPublishers: HarperResource, c1991.  vi, 297p.  Selected Readings at ends of chapters. (Harpers College Outline).  Glossary p.253-287.  Index.  #13599  4.25

BF131.J2 1963   James, William, 1842-1910.  Psychology.  Introduction by Ashley Montagu.  Fawcett: Premier, 1963; 1st published, 1892, as Psychology, brief course based on Principles of psychology, 1890.  416p.  Index.  #5092  .50

BF145.A23 1990 Ref  ABCs of the human mind: a family answerbook. Editor: Alma E. Guiness. Chief Consultant: Herbert H. Kraus. The Readers Digest Association, Inc., c1990. 336p., illus. (part color): photos, drawings, diagrams, charts, facsimilies. Index. Credits and Acknowledgments: Text p. 335. Illustrations p.335-336.  #14114b 1.10

BF145.M476 1983   Miller, Jonathan, 1934-                                States of mind.  Pantheon Books, c1983.  316p.  black & white photos, drawings, diagrms.  Suggestions for Further Reading p.293-302.  Index.  #9522  .08

BF149.M39 1980   May, Rollo.  Psychology and the human dilemma.  Norton, 1980.  221p.  Bibliographical notes at ends of chapters.  #5882  .50

BF161.H5 1954   Highet, Gilbert.  Man’s unconquerable mind.  Columbia University Press, 1954.  viii, 136p.  Notes p.129-136.  #7680  2.10

BF161.L28   Langer, Susanne Katerina Knauth, 1895-1985. Mind: an essay on human feeling.  The Johns Hopkins University press, 1980 c1967, 1974 c1972,                  v. (xxiii, 487; xii, 400p.).  Bibliography p.445-469; 357-379.  V.1: pts. I-III; V.2: pt. IV.  #10461, 10313 11.20

BF161.O9 1949   Overstreet, Harray Allen, 1875-        The mature mind.  W.W. Norton, c1949.  295p.  #9881  1.05

BF161.R9 1949   Ryle, Gilbert, 1900-               The concept of mind.  Harper & Row: Barnes & Noble Books, c1949.  334p.  Incex.  #10535  4.25

BF161.W49 1969   Wilson, John Rowan, 1919-      The mind. … and the Editors of Time-Life Books. Time-Life Books, c1969; 1st published 1964. 280p., illus (part color). (Life Science Library). Further Reading p.196. Acknowledgements p.196. Index. Picture Credits p.200.  #15814

BF173.F682 1994   Freud, Sigmund, 1856-1939.  Civilization and its discontents.  Translated by Joan Riviere.  Dover Publications, 1994; republication of 1930, 1st published as Das Unbehagen in der Kultur.  70p.  #1429  1.06

BF173.F7 1958   Freud, Sigmund, 1856-1939.   A general introduction to psychoanalysis.  Auth. English tr. of the rev. ed. by Joan Reviere.  Permabooks, 1958 c1935.  480p.  Index  #96  .50

BF173.F7 1977   Freud, Sigmund, 1856-1939.  Introductory lectures on psychoanalysis.  Translated and edited by James Strachey.  Norton: liveright, 1977; 1st published in 3 parts, 1916.  Bibliography and Author Index p.467-480.  Indexes.  #5226  .10

BF173.F825 1964   Freud, Sigmund, 1856-1939.  Psychopathology of everyday life.  Authorized English ed.  With introduction by A. H. Brill.  New American Library: A Mentor Book, 1964 c1951; 1st published as Zur psychopatholgie des Alttagslebens.  159p.  #12142  .25

BF173.F85G377 1988   Gay, Peter, 1923-       Freud: a life for our time.  W.W. Norton & Company, c1988.  xxi, 810p., black & white phtographs.  Bibliographical Essays p.741-779.  Acknowledgements.  p.781-782.  Index.  #11466  .25

BF173.F92 1970   Fromm, Erich, 1900-1980.  The crisis of psychoanalysis.  Holt, Rinehart, Winston, 1970.  161p.  Bibliographical footnotes.  #5227  .55

BF173.J7253 1959   Jung, Carl Gustav, 1875-1961.   The undiscovered self.  New American Library: Mentor, 1959 c1958.  125p.  #81.  .50

BF173.J665 1970   Jung, Carl Gustav, 1975-1961.  Analytical phychology: its theory and practice.  Foreword by E. A. Bennet.  Random House: Vintge Books, 1970 c1968.  xvi, 227p., diagrams, charts, graphs.  List of Works Cited p.211-213.  Index.  The Collected Works of … [p.227].  #9706  3.20

BF173.J73 1968   Jung, Carl Gustav, 1875-1961,  Man and his symbols.  Dell: Laurel, 1968 c1964.  413p.  Notes p.389-402.  Index.  #1573  gift

BF173.J8 1977    Jung, Carl Gustav, 1875-1961.  Two essays on analytival psychology.  2d ed.  Translabed by R.F.C. Hull.  Princeton University press, 1977 c1966; 1st published 1953 from Über du Psychologie des Unbewusstem (1943) and Die Beziehungen Zwischen dem Ich und dem Unbesussten (1928; 2d ed. 1935).  Xi, 349p.  Bibliography p.307-312.  Index.  (Bollingen Series, XX v.7).  #9907  6.95

BF173.J85G6 1966   Goldbrunner, Josef.  Individuation: a study of the depth psychology of Carl Gustave Jung.  Translated by Stalnely Godman.  University of Notre Dame Press, 1966 c1964; 1st published as Die Tiefenpsychologie von Carl Gustave Jung.  Xii, 204p.  Bibliographical footnotes.  #11152  .50

BF173.L26 1970   Lawrence, D(avid) H(erbert) 1885-1930.  Psychoanalysis and the unconscious and Fantasia of the unconscious.  Introduction by Philip Rieff.  Viking, 1970; 1st published 1921, 1922.  225p.  #1633  .25

BF173.J85S75 1990   Stevens, Anthony, 1933-        On Jung. Routledge, c1990. x, 292p. frontispiece, photos, drawings, diagrams. Figures p.vii. Acknowledgements p.ix-x. Bibliography p.277-281. Index. #16140 gift

BF173.W43 1958   Wheelis, Allen, 1915-2007. The quest for identity. W.W. Norton Company, c1958. 250p. Notesp.247-250. On cover: The decline of the superego and what is happening to American character as a result. #15758 .75

BF173.Y3 1970   Yankelovich, Daniel and Barrett, William.  Ego and instinct: the psychoanalytic view of human nature–revised.  Random House, 1970.  xiv, 494p.  Bibliography p.471-479.  Index.  #7726  1.10

BF175.A45 1958   Adler, Alfred, 1870-1937.  What life should mean to you.  Edited by Alan Porter.  Capricorn Books, 1958.  300p.  Index.  #1988  1.60

BF175.E74 1975   Erikson, Erik Homburger, 1902-       Life history and the historical moment.  W.W. Norton & Company, c1975.  283p.  Notes p.267-270.  Index.  #11465  .25

BF175.4.C84S68 1998   The soul of popular culture: looking at contemporary heroes, myths, and monsters.  Edited by Mary Lynn Kittelson.  Open Court, c1998.  xii, 338p., drawings, bibliographies at ends of chapters.  About the Authors p.ix-xii.  Index.  #9426  Review.

BF175.5.A72S75 1983   Stevens, Anthony, 1933-        Archetypes: a natural history of the self. Quill, 1983, c1982.[xii]. 324p. Acknowledgements p.ix. Glossary p.296-301. Bibliography p.302-309. Index. #16139 gift

BF175.5.O22M37 1995    Marcus, Clare Cooper. House as a mirror of self: exploring the deeper meaning of home. Forword by James Yandell p.xiii-xvi. References p.303-307. Conari Press, c1995. xvi, 307p. Acknowledgements p.ix-xii. #14441 4.30

BF204.R64 1980   Rogers, Carl Ransom, 1902-1987. A way of living. Houghton Mifflin Company, c1980. x, 38 p. Bibliographical references at ends of chapters. Chronological Bibliography .357-375. Acknowledgements p.377-379. Index.  #15804 2.15

BF233.A24 1991   Ackerman, Diane.   Natural history of the senses.  Random House: Vintage, 1991 c1990.  331p., Further Reading p.311-315  Index.  #923  10.54

BF251.B4713 1992   Berendt, Joachim-Ernst.  The third ear: on listening to the world.  Translated by Tim Nevill.  Foreword by Yehudi Menuhin.  Henry Holt: Owl Book, 1992 c1985; 1st published as Das Dritheor.  234p., diagrams, photos.  Bibliography p.223-226.  Indexes.  #1520  .27

BF311.D384 1991   DeBono, Edward, 1933-                I am right—you are wrong.  From this to the new Renaissance: from rock logic to water logic.  Penguin Books, 1991 c1990.  xx, 293p.  #11189  5.30

BF311.K23 2005   Kahn, Alan R., 1932-      and Radcliffe, Kris Austen, 1968-      Mindshapes: understanding the differences in thinking and communication. Paragon House c2005. xxii, 336p. diagrams, tables. List of Figures p.xii-xiv. List of Tables p.xiv. Appendices: A. Child Development p.285-290. B. Comparing the Myers-Briggs Tpe Indicator and the HDM p.286-296. C. The Operator in Action p.297-298. Glossary p.299-315. References and Suggested Readings p.317-324.  Index. #14906 gift

BF311.N565 2003   Nisbett, Richard E., 1942-       The geography of thought: how Asians and Westerners think differently and why. Simon & Schuster: Free Press, 2004 c2003. xxiv, 264p. drawings, diagrams. Acknowledgements p.x-xi. Notes p.231-239. References p.241-252. Index. About the Author p.264. #16124 3.20

BF311.N675 1998   Norretranders, Tor.  The user illusion: cutting consciousness down to size.  Translated by Jonathan Sydenham.  Viking, 1998; 1st published 1991 as Maerk ver den.  467p.  Bibliography p.445-456.  Index.  #5927

BF311.O75 1986   Ornstein, Robert Evans. The psychology of consciousness. 2nd rev. ed. Penguin Books, c1986; first published 1972. xiv, 314p., photos, drawings, diagrams, tables. Acknowledgements p.ix-x. References p.297-304. Index.  #13654  free

BF318.H38 1991   Healy, Jane M.   Endangered minds: why our children don’t think.  Simon & Schuster: Touchstone Book, 1991 c1990.  382p., notes p. 347-366  Index.  #1112  11.72

BF319.5.B5B76 1979   Brown, Barbara B.  New mind, new body: bio-feedback.  New directions for the mind.  Bantam Books, 1979 c1974.  xiv, 523p., diagrams.  Appendices A-E, p.461-475.  Bibliography p.477-511.  Index.  #10408  .50

BF321.L23 1990   Langer, Ellen J.   Mindfulness.  Addison-Wesley: A Merlboyd Lawrence Book, 1990 c1987.  233p., Bibl. notes p. 205-244  Index.  #1070 Exchange

BF323.C5A37 1980   Azzen, Icek and Fishbein, Martin.  Understanding attitudes and predicting social behavior.  Prentice-Hall, c1980.  x, 278p., graphs, charts.  References p.249-257.  Appendices: A, Steps in the Construction of a Standard Questionnaire p.261-263.  B., Sample Questionnaire p.264-274.  Index.  #11455  1.00

BF323.C8E8 1969   Explorations in exploration: stimulation seeking.   An enduring problem in psychology.  Ed. by David Lester.  Van Nostrand Reinhold, 1969.  217p., tables, graphs, references.  #1091  1.34

BF335.W423 1991   Weilen, Wayne; Lloyd, Margaret A., and Lashley, Roben L.  Psychology applied to modern life: Adjustment in the 90s.  3rd ed.  Brooks/Cote Publishing Company, c1991; 1st published 1983.  xxxiii, 542p., color photos, diagrams, cartoons, graphs, scales, questionnaires.  Contains Recommended Reading.  Glossary p.488-494.  References p.495-500.  Indexes.  Credits p.539.  #12833  .25

BF341.P47 2002   Pinker, Stephen, 1954-      The blank slate: the modern denial of human nature.  Viking, c2002.  xvi, 509p.  Appendix: Donald E. Brown’s List of Human Universals p.435-439.  References p.461-489.  Index.  #11964  18.89

BF371.R84 1998   Rupp, Rebecca.  Committed to memory: how we remember and why we forget.  Crown Publishers, Inc., c1998.  xx, 331p.  Bibliography p.309-318.  Index.  #13051  1.10

BF385.L755 1980   Lorayne, Harry and Jerry Lucas.   Memory book.  Ballantine Books, 1980 c1974.  206p.  #1027.  .32

BF408.D24 1965   Daedalus (Periodical).  Creativity and learning.  By Jerome B. Wiessner and others.  Stephen R. Graubard, Editor.  The American Academy of Arts and Sciences, c1965.  iv, p.527-736.  (v.94 no.3, Summer 1965).  References at ends of articles.  #10049  .70

BF408.C6 1952   Creative process: a symposium.  .  Brewster Ghiselin.  New American Library: Mentor, 1952.  251p.  #1050  Contains excerpts from creative artists, writers and thinkers.   #1050 .25

BF408.D4427 1982   de Bono, Edward, 1933-        Serious creativity: using the power of lateral thinking to create new ideas.  HarperCollinsPublishers: Harper Business, c1992.  xiv, 338p.  Index.  #11352  .30

BF408.F747 2011   Friedman, Thomas L. & Mandelbaum, Michael. That used to be us: how American fell behind in the world it invented and how we can come back. Farrar, Straus and Giroux, c2011. xiv, 380p., diagram, graphs, table. Acknowledgements p.359-360. Index. #14457 10.00

BF408.G37 1998   Gelb, Michael J., 1952-      How to think like Leonardo da Vinci: seven steps to genius every day. Delacorte Press, c1998. xiv, 320p., illus.: photos, drawings, cartoons, diagrams, maps. Acknowledgements p.vii-viii. Chronology p.309. Recommended Reading p.310-315. Resources p.316-318. List of Illustrations p.319-321. About the Author p.322. #15055 3.20

BF408.G38 1993   Gardner, Howard.  Creating minds: an anatomy of creativity seen through the lives of Freud, Einstein, Picasso, Stravinsky, Eliot, Graham, and Gandhi.  Basic Books, 1993.  464p., photos.  Bibliography p.435-449.  #5263  4.82

BF408.K6 1964   Koestler, Arthur, 1905-1983.  The act of creation.  Arkana, c1964.  751p., diagrams.  Works Mentioned in the Book p.717-728.  Index.  #10426  1.05

BF408.M25 1970   Maritain, Jacques, 1882-1973.  Creative intuition in art and poetry.  The A. W. Mellon Lectures in the Fine Arts.  World Publishing: Meridian Books, 1970 c1953.  339p.  Notes p.297-339.  #1627  1.00

BF408.O8 1963   Osborn, Alex F.  Applied imagination: principles and procedures of creative problem-solving. 3rd rev. ed.  Charles Scribners Sons, c1963; 1st published 1953.  xxix, 417p.  Exercises & References at ends of chapters.  Index.  #12764  .25

BF408.S263 1961   Sartre, Jean-Paul, 1905-1980.  The psychology of imagination.  The Citadel Press, 1961 c1948.  iv, 282p.  #7524  .50

BF408.S35 1988   Shank, Roger C.   The creative attitude: learning to ask and answer the right questions.  With Peter Childers.  Macmillan, 1988.  372p.  Index.  #417  18.34

BF408.S43 1996   Significant others: creativity and intimate partnership.  Edited by Whitney Chadwick & Isabelle de Courtivron.  With 76 illustrations.  Thames and Hudson, c1993.  256p., illus., photos.  Notes and Selected Bibliographies p.244-253.  Notes on the Contributors p.254.  Index.  #12679  1.10

BF412.B824 1990   Briggs, John.  Fire in the crucible: the self-creation of creativity and genius.  Tarcher, 1990. 382p. Notes p.334-373. Index.  #5043 3.18

BF416.A1M87 2003   Murray, Charles A.  Human accomplishment: the pursuit of excellence in the arts and sciences, 800 B.C. to 1950.  HarperCollinsPublishers, c2003.  xx, 668p., maps, graphs, tables, statistics.  Significant Events [chronologies] p.163-204.  Appendices 1-5 p.459-588.  Bibliography p.625-638.  Index.  #12640  4.00

BF431.D8155 2005   Droge, Edward F. Your intelligence makeover: an easy way to learn all you need to know. Free Press, c2005. xiv, 302p. Acknowledgements p.vii. Contains quizes and exercises. Resources for Further Explanation at ends of subject sections. Index.  #14079 6.45

BF431.E85 1985   Essays on the intellect. Edited by Francis R. Link. Association for Supervision and Curricular Development, 1985. viii, 151p. References at ends of articles. #14371 gift.

BF431.G68 1981   Gould, Stephen Jay.   Mismeasure of man.  Norton, 1981.  352p., illus., bibl. p.337-344  Index.  #928.  8.58

BF431.M553 1986   Minsky, Marvin Lee.   The society of mind.  Simon and Schuster, 1986.  339p., Additional References p.332  Index.  #418.  18.89

BF431.O68 1989   Ornstein, Robert.   Multimind.  Doubleday: Anchor Books, 1989 c1986.  206p., References p.203-206.  #961.  1.89

BF431.P482 1972   Piaget, Jean.  Psychology of intelligence.   Littlefield, Adams & Co., 1972 c1966; 1st pub. 1947 as La Psychologie de L’Intelligence.  182p.  Short Bibliography p.174-176.  Indexes.  #1028  .32

BF431.S19 1980   Sagan, Carl.  Broca’s brain: the romance of science.  Hodder & Stoughton: Coronet Books, 1980.  426p.   References p.391-394.  Appendices.  Index.  #1005  .54

BF431.S2 1978   Sagan, Carl.  Dragons of Eden: speculations on the evolution of human intelligence.   Ballantine Books, 1978 c1977.  271p., drawings, photos, charts.  Bibliography p.251-259.  Glossary p.261-266.  Index.  #1164  .10

BF435.T2 1993   Tabori, Paul.  Natural history of stupidity.  Barnes & Noble, 1993; 1st published as The natural science of stupidity, 1959.  288p.  Bibliography p.265-267.  Index.  #1842  2.10

BF441.A28 1986   Adams, James L.   Conceptual blockbusting; a guide to better ideas. 3d ed.  Addison-Wesley, 1986.  161p.  Reader’s Guide p.153-161.  Index.  #419    13.95

BF441.C356 1998   Chaffee, John.  The thinker’s way: 8 steps to a richer life.  Little, Brown and Company, c1998.  ix, 420p.  Index.  #11318  5.30

BF441.D41 1985   DeBono, Edward.  Six thinking hats: the power of focused thinking.  6 proven ways to effectively focus your creative thinking.  International Center for Creative Thinking, 1985.  207p.  #5512  .50

BF441.M39 1994   McCrone, John.  The myth of irrationality: the science of the mind from Plato to Star Trek.  Carroll & Graf, 1994.  340p.  Bibliographical Notes p.295-333.  Index.  #5445  4.25

BF441.M515 1991   Michaud, Ellen and Wild, Russell.  Boost your brainpower: a total program to strengthen and expand your most important resource.  With the Editors of Prevention Magazine.  MJF Books, c1991.  viii, 471p., drawings, diagrams, tables.  Puzzle Power Answers p.454-458.  Index.  #12566  2.15

BF441.P47 2000   Perkins, David N.  Archimedes’ bathtub: the art and logic of breakthrough thinking.  W. W. Norton & Company, c2000.  x, 292p., drawings, diagrams.  Notes p.271-282.  #11578  6.35

BF441.T4 1968   Thinking and reasoning: selected readings.  Edited by P. C. Wason and P. N. Johnson-Laird.  Penguin Books, 1968.  431p., graphs, figures, charts.  References at ends of chapters.  Further Reading p.422-424.  Index.  #1716  1.60

BF448.L45 2010   Lehrer, Jonah, How we decide. Houghton Mifflin Company: Mariner Books, 2010, c2009. xviii, 302p. Acknowledgements p.263-265. Notes p.266-273. Bibliography p.274-287. Index. #14141 5.60

BF455.D363 1986   De Bono, Edward, 1933-               De Bono’s thinking course.  Facts on File Publications, 1985.  192p.  Index.  #420.  15.74

BF455.D37 1969   De Bono, Edward, 1933-                 The mechanism of mind.  Simon & Schuster, c1969.  274p., diagrams.  #9880  1.05

BF455.D375 1976   De Bono, Edward, 1933-               Practical thinking: 4 ways to be right; 5 ways to be wrong; 5 ways to understand.  Penguin Books, 1991 c1971.  189p., drawings.  #9284  .50

BF455.D56 1949   Dimnet, Ernest, 1866-       The art of thinking.  36th printing.  Simone & Schuster, 1949 c1928.  xii, 221p.  Index.  #38r.  .50+gift

BF455.H4213 1968   Heidegger, Martin, 1889-1976.  What is called thinking?  Translation of Was Heisst Dunken?  With introduction by J. Glenn Gear.  Harper & Row Perennial Library, 1968; 1st published 1954..  244p.  #1598.  2.87

BF455.O4 1946   Ogden, C         K        1889-1957 and Richards, Ivor Armstrong, 1893-1979.  The meaning of meaning: a study of the influence of language upon thought and of the science of sybmbolism.  8th ed.  With supplementary essays by B. Malinowski and F.G. Crookshank.  Harcourt, Brace & World: A Harvest Book, 1946; 1st published 1923.  xxiv, 363p., diagrams, indexes.  #8030  .50

BF456.R2S685 1999   Spitz, Ellen Handler.  Inside picture books.  Yale University press: Yale Nota Bene, c1999.  xxii, 230p., illus.  Picture Books Cited p.217-220.  Secondary Sources p.221-225.  Index.  #10468  14.95

BF458.L29 1953   Langer, Susanne Katherine Knauth.  Feeling and form: a theory of art.  Developed from Philosophy in a new key.  Charles Scribners Sons, c1953.  xvi, 431p., black & white illus.  Bibliography p.417-423.  Index.  #12117  .25

BF458.L3 1959   Langer, Susanne Katherine Knauth.   Philosophy in a new key; a study in the symbolism of reason, rite, and art.  2d ed.  New American Library.: Mentor, 1959 c1951.  256p., bibl.  Index.  #39  .50

BF471.S56 1989   Simon, Sidney B.  Getting unstuck: breaking through your barriers to change.  Warner Books, 1989 c1988.  296p., Recommended Reading, p.291  Index.  #958  9.54

BF505.R48 K65 1993   Kohn, Alfie.  Punished by rewards: the trouble with gold stars, incentive plans, A’s, praise, and other bribes.  Houghton Mifflin, 1993.  398p.  References p.352-384.  Indexes.  #1407  10.55

BF531.N3 1968   The nature of emotion: selected readings.  Edited by Magda B. Arnold.  Penguin Books, 1968.  398p.  References at ends of articles.  Indexes.  #1458  1.11

BF575.A3 B3 1975   Bach, George R. and Herb Goldberg.   Creative aggression.  Avon Books, 1975 c1974.  333p., References p.328-333.  #1006.  .27

BF575.A6B47 1993   Berent, Jonathan and Lamley, Amy.  Beyond shyness: how to conqueor social anxieties.  Simon & Schuster, 1993.  285p., drawings, worksheets  Index.  #1503  1.91

BF575.A88D45 1995   Deci, Edward L and Flaste, Richard.  Why we do what we do.  Grosset/Putnam, 1995.  230p.  List of Research Articles p.217-222.  $5186  4.25

BF575.B3C47 1989   Cheek, Jonathan M.  Conquering shyness: the battle anyone can win.  With Bronwen Cheek and Larry Rothstein.  G.P. Putnam & Sons, c1989.  224p.  Suggested Reading p.213-218.  Index.  #11349  .30

BF575.C85W44 1983   Weisinger, Hendric and Labsenz, Norman M.  Nobody’s perfect: how to give criticism and get results.  Warner Books, 1983 c1981.  269p.  Bibliography p.264-269.  #1855  .50

BF575.D35V56 1987   Viorst, Judith, 1931-          Necessary losses: the loves, illusions, dependencies and impossible expectations that all of us have to give up in order to grow.  Fawcett Gold Medal, 1987 c1986.  499p.  Bibliography p.461-482.  Index.  #5149  .50

BF575.F2G37 2009   Gardner, Daniel, 1968-     The science of fear: how the culture of fear manipulates your brain. The Penguin Group: A Plume Book, 2009, c2008. [xiv], 351p. Notes p.317-336. Bibliograhy p.337-340. Acknowledgements p.341. Index.  #14452 8.60

BF575.I5M32 1989   McAdams, Dan P.   Intimacy: the need to be close.  Doubleday, 1989. 252p., notes p.201-240  Index.  #483.  2.84

BF575.L8B7 1981   Branden, Nathaniel.  The psychology of romantic love: what love is, why love is born, why it sometimes grows, why it sometimes dies.  Bantam Books, 1981 c1990.  224p., index.  #7298  .50

BF575.L8B72 1987   Branden, Nathaniel and Devers Branden.  What love asks of us: solutions to the challenge of making.  love work.  Rev. & exp.  Bantam Books, 1987.  294p., Selected Bibliography p.285-287  Index #1125  Originally: Romantic love question & answer book, 1983.  2.68

BF575.L8J63 1983   Johnson, Robert A., 1921-                           We: understanding the psychology of romantic love.  Harper & Row, c1983.  xv, 204p.  Bibliography p.202-204.  #9930  .25

BF575.L8M26 1979   McGinnis, Alan Loy.   The Friendship factor: how to get closer to the people you care for.  Augsburg, 1979.  192p.  #489  3.45

BF575.L8O77 1969   Ortega y Gasset, José, 1883-1955.  On love: aspects of a single theme.  Translated by Tobly Talbot.  The World Publishing Company: Meridian Books, 1969 c1957; 1st published as Estudios Sobre el Amor.  190p.  #12278  3.15

BF575.P9A38 1958   Allport, Gordon W.  The nature of prejudice.  Abridged.  Doubleday: Ancor Books, 1958.  219p.  Notes and References at ends of chapters.  Indexes.  #1459  1.34

BF575.P9Y686 1996   Young-Bruehl, Eliszabeth.  The anatomy of prejudices.  Harvard University Press, c1996.  [v], 632p.  Bibliography p.591-618.  Index.  #11821  3.75

BF575.S39B73 1988   Branden, Nathaniel.  How to raise your self-esteem.  Bantam Books, 1988 c1987.  166p.  #5358  .55

BF611 .V57 1979  Viscott, David.  Risking.  Pocket Books, 1979 c1977.  220p.  #1457  .11

BF629.M4 1942   Menninger, Karl Augustus, 1893-                    Love against hate.  Wht thecollaboration of Jeanetta Lyle Menninger.  Harcourt, Brace and Company, c1942.  ix, 310p.  Source Notes p.295-301.  Index.  #10389  1.05

BF629.5.S26 1988   Sanford, John A. and Lough, George.  What men are like.  Paulist Press, c1988.  vii, 315p.  Suggested Reading at ends of chapters.  Index.  #10453  .75

BF636.S69 1957   Sperling, Abraham P.   How to make psychology work for you.  Formerly: Psychology for the millions.  newly rev. ed.  Fawcett: Premier, 1957.  192p.  #40  .35

BF637.B4P65 1994   Prochaska, James O., Norcorss, John C., DiClemente, Carlo C.  Changing for good: the revolutionary program that explains the six stages of change and teaches you how to free yourself from bad habits.  William Morrow and Company, c1994.  304p., tables.  Bibliography p.290-293.  Index.  #11413  2.15

BF637.C4G37 2006   Gardner, Howard. Changing minds: the art and science of changing our own and other people’s minds. Harvard Business School Press, c2006. xvi, 244p. Appendix: A Framework for Analyzing Cases in Mind Changing p.213-233. Index. About the Author p.243-244. #13649 4.90

BF637.C45A33 1983   Adler, Barbara B. and others.  Interplay: the process of interpersonal communication.  2d ed.  Holt, Rinehart & Winston, 1983.  308p., photos, cartoons.  Readings at ends of chapters.  Indexes.  #5107  .10

BF637.C45C78 2002   Crucial conversations: tools for talking when stakes are high. Kerry Patterson and others. McGraw-Hill, c2002. xvi, 240p. Acknowledgemens p.xv. Endnotes p.229. Index. About the Authors p.237-238.  #14485 2.15

BF637.C45G65 1988   Goodman, Gerald.   The talk book: the intimate science of communicating in close relationships.  With Glenn Erterly.  Rodale, 1988.  360p. index.  #495  1.90

BF637.C45S87 1992   Swets, Paul W.  The art of talking so people will listen: getting through to family, friends, and business associates.  Simon & Schuster: Fireside, 1992 c1983.  188p., diagrams.  Notes p.181-184.  Index.  #1621  2.87

BF637.C45W24 1976   Wahlroos, Sven.  Family communication: a guide to emotional health.  New American Library: Signet, 1976 c1974.  344p.  Index.  #1179  .32

BF637.C45E26 1999   Wallace, Patricia M. The psychology of the Internet. Cambridge University Press, c1999. xiv, 264p. Contains bibliographic footnotes. Index. #14113 2.00

BF637.C45Z86 1984   Zunin, Leonard with Natalie Zunin.  Contact: the first four minutes.  Ballantine Books, 1984 c1972.  271p., Selected Readings p.270-271.  #1180  .32

BF637.C5K4 1974   Kennedy, Eugene C.  The pain of being human.  Doubleday: Image, 1974.  277p.  #7453  .50

BF637.C5O5 1975   O’Neill, Nena and George.   Shifting gears.  Avon, 1975 c1974.  281p.  Bibliography p.273-278.  Recommended Books p.279-280.  #1024.  .26

BF637.D65S38 1997   Schwartz, Hillel, 1948-      The culture of the copy: striking likenesses, unreasonable facsimilies.  Zone Books, 1996.  565p, illus., Notes p.383-534.  Index.  #5071  Review

BF637.H4K57 2014  Klein, Stefan, 1965-        Survival of the nicest: how altruism made us human and why it pays to get along. Translated by David Pollenmayer. The Experiment, c2014; first published c2010 as Sinn des Gebens. xviii, 254p. Notes p.211-223. Index. Acknowledgementsp.253. About the Author p.254. #16200 1.00

BF637.L53B76 1988   Bro, Harmon Hartzell.   Growing through personal crisis.  With Jaru Avis Bro.  Harper & Row, 1988.  206p., selected bibl. p.201-2  Index.  #500  1.23

BF637.N4F58 1988   Fisher, Roger.   Getting together: Building a relationship that gets to yes.  With Scott Brown.  Houghton Mifflin, 1988.  216p.  #470  1.33

BF637.N4R34 1982   Raiffa, Howard, 1924-                               The art and science of negotiation.  Harvard University Press, c1982.  x,373p., graphs, statistical tables.  Bibliography p.361-368.  Index.  #10413  .55

BF637.P3I713 1961   Irala, Narcisco.  Achieving peace of heart.  Translated by Lewis Delmage.  Joseph F. Wagner, Inc., 1961 c1954; 1st published as O Controlé Cerebra, 1944.  223p., diagrams.  #12878  .40

BF637.P4B76 1971   Brown, James Alexander Campbell, 1911-1964.  Techniques of persuasion from propaganda to brainwashing.  Penguin Books, 1971 c1963.  325p.  Bibliography p.319-321.  Index.  #12417  .60

BF637.S4H3 1990   Helmstetter, Shad.   Choices.  Pocket Books, 1990 c1989.  273p.  #505  4.74

BF637.S4P43 1979   Peck, M. Scott.   The road less travelled; a new psychology of love, traditional values and spiritual growth.  Simon & Schuster: Touchstone, 1979 c1978.  315p.  #468  10.45

BF637.S4T37 1989   Handlin, Steven J.   Discriminating mind: a guide to deepening insight and clarifyinging outlook.  Unwin Paperbacks: Mandala, 1989.  255p.  References p.255.  #1075  3.19

BF637.S8C522 1993   Clausen, John A.  American lives looking back at the children of ghe Great Depression.  With a foreword by Glen H. Elder.  Macmillan: The Free Press, c1993.  xix, 592p.  References p.577-584.  Indexes.  #10985  2.50

BF637.S8C67 1991   Covey, Stephen R.  Principle-centered leadership.  Summit Books, 1991.  334p.  Index.  #915.  5.30

BF637.S8C68 1989   Covey, Stephen R.   The seven habits of highly effective people: restoring the character ethic.  Simon & Schuster: A Fireside Book, 1989.  358p., diagrams  Indexes.  #467  9.49

BF637.S8G533 2008   Gladwell, Malcolm (Timothy) 1963-        Outliers: the story of success. Little, Brown and Company, c2008. xii, 310p., diagrams, graphs, tables. Notes p.287-296. Acknowledgements p.297-299. Index. [About the Author] p.310. #15001  5.40

BF637.S8K4 1995   Kiefer, Michael Monroe.  Powermind system: twelve lessons on the psychology of success.  Kiefer Enterprises, 1995.  433p., diagrams.  #1989  Review

BF637.S8L34 1974   Lakein, Alan.  How to get control of your time and your life.  New American Library: Signet, 1974 c1973.  160p.  #1476  .32

BF637.S8M2 1994   McWilliams, Peter.  Do it! Let’s get off our butts.  Prelude Books, 1994.  488p.  #5136  5.75

BF637.S8N58 2002   Niven, David, 1971-      The 100 simple secrets of successful people: what scientists have learned and how you can use it. HarperCollinsPublishers: HarperSanFrancisco c2002. xii, 212p. Bibliography p.201-212.  #14014 .80

BF637.S8R56 1986   Robbins, Anthony.  Unlimited power.  Fawcett Columbine, 1987 c1986.  xix, 421p., drawings, diagrams.  Glossary p.415-419.  #11572  .25

BF692.B46 1976   Bird, Joseph W. and Bird, Lois F.  Sexual loving: the experience of love.  Doubleday & Company, c1976.  264p.  Bibliography p.256-264.  #11347  .30

BF692.M34 1974   May, Rollo.   Love and will.  Dell: A Laurel Edition, 1974 c1969.  363p.  Index.  #909.  .93

BF692.2.B46 1988   Benjamin, Jessica.  Bonds of love: psychoanalysis, feminism and the problem of domination.  Pantheon, 1988.  304p., notes p.245-294  Index.  #1042  .95

BF692.2.T38 1984   Tavris, Carol and Wade, Carole.  The longest war: sex differences in perspective.  2d ed.  Harcourt, Brace, Jovanovich, 1984.  416p., drawings, graphs, tables.  References p.369-400.  Index.  #7150  .55

BF692.5.B47 1996   Bergman, Charles.  Orion’s legacy: a cultural history of man as hunter.  A Plume Book, 1997 c1996.  [vi], 359p.  Notes p.319-344.  Index.  #12279  3.70

BF697.B687 1985.   Branden, Nathaniel.   Honoring the self: the psychology of confidance and respect.  Bantam Books, 1985 c1983.  266p.  Bibliography p.253-258  Index.  #422  4.19

BF697.B7 1986   Branden, Nathaniel.   The psychology of self-esteem: a new concept of man’s psychological nature.  Bantam, 1986 c1969.  260p.  Index.  #423  4.77

BF697.E7 1968   Erikson, Erik H.  Identity, youth and crisis.  W. W. Norton, 1968.  336p.  Writings on Which this Book Is Based p.321.  Index.  #7635  1.00

BF697.G58 1974   Good, Paul.  The individual.  With the editors of Time-Life Books.  Time-Life Books, c1974.  176p., photos, diagrams, color illus.  Bibliography p.172.  Index.  #10592  free

BF697.J65 1971   Jourard, Sidney M.  The transparent self.  Rev. ed.  Van Nostrand Reinhold, 1971.  250p.  Bibliography p.239-245.  Index.  #1428  2.50

BF697.L396 1995   Lerner, Rokelle.  Living in the comfort zone: the gift of relationship.  Health Communications, 1995.  194p.  Bibliography p.189-191.  #1972  Review

BF697.M9 1969   Myers, Gerald E.  Self: an introduction to philosophical psychology.  Pegasus, c1969.  xii, 13-173p.  (Traditions in Philosophy).  Notes p.153-165.  Supplemental Bibliography p.167.  Index.   #13367  4.30

BF697.5.S43K44 1989   Keen, Sam.   Your mythic journey: finding meaning in your life through writing and storytelling.  With Anne Valley-Fox.  Tarcher, 1989.  129p.  #494    9.49

BF697.5.S46B75 1995   Branden, Nathaniel.  The six pillars of self-esteem.  Bantam, 1995 c1994.  341p.  Recommendations for further study p.319-321.  References p.323-325.  Index.  #1736  12.47

BF697.5.S46S74 1991   Steinem, Gloria, 1934-          Revolution from within: a book of self-esteem.  Little, Brown, 1992.  377p.  Bibliotherapy p.335-344.  Index.  #1841  2.10

BF697.5.S65C73 2015   Crawford, Matthew B       The world beyond your head: on becoming an individual in an age of distraction. Farrar, Straus and Giroux, c2015. x, 307p. #16116 2.15

BF698.C36 1967   Cattell, Raymond Bernard, 1905-         The scientific analysis of personality.  Penguin Books, 1967 c1965.  399p., drawings, diagrams, charts, tables.  Glossary p.367-376.  Indexes.  #7301  .50

BF698.K357 1984   Kiersey, David.   Please understand me: character and temperament types.  With Marilyn Bates.  5th ed.  Prometheus Nemesis Book Co., 1984.  210p.  Bibliography p.209-210  #497  11.45

BF698.L46 1968   Lidz, Thodore.  The person: his development throughout the life cycle.  Basic Books, c1968.  xxii, 574p.  Suggested Readings at ends of chapters.  Index.  #10398  1.45

BF698.M336 1971  Maslow, Abraham H., 1908-1970.  The farther reaches of human nature.  Viking, 1971.  423p.  Maslow: a bibliography p.391-407.  Bibliography p.409-417.  Index.  #5568  .35

BF698.M38 1968   Maslow, Abraham H., 1908-1970.   Toward a psychology of being.  2d ed.  D. Van Nostrand, 1968.  240p.  Bibliography p.223-237.  The Eupsychian Network p.237-240.  #914  1.07

BF698.T62 1973   Tournier, Paul.  The meaning of persons.  Harper & Row: Perennial, 1973 c1957.  Translated from La Personnage et la Personne.  244p.  Index.  #1594 .27

BF698.3.L57 1986   Littauer, Florence, 1928-   Your personality tree.  With suggestions for individual and grup activities.  Word Publishing, c1986.  237p., charts.  Notes p.217-219.  [Personality Profile materials] p.220-235.  Personality Comparison Chart Sources p.236-237.  #12677  1.05

BF698.3.M55 1997   Miller, Marlane.  Brainstyles: change your life without changing who you are.  Simon & Schuster, c1997.  384p., photos, cartoons, charts, questionnaire survey forms.  Notes p.367-370 and other bibliographical references.  Index.  #11290  1.40

BF698.3.O43 1990   Oldham, John M. and Morris, Lois B. Personality self-portrait: why you think, work, love and act the way you do. Bantam Books, c1990. x, 438p., charts, questionnaire. Acknowledgements p.viii. Chapter Notes p.413-418. Bibliography p.419-426. About the Authors p.427. Index. 12MR92 19.54

BF698.3.Q46 1993   Quenk, Naomi L., 1936-          Beside ourselves: our hidden personality in everyday life.  Consulting Psychologists Press: CPP Books, 1993.  292p., diagrams.  References p.281-282.  Index.  #7472b  .85

BF698.35.S47A76 1996   Aron, Elaine N.  The highly sensitive person: how to thrive when the world overwhelms you.  Carol Publishing: Birch Lane Press, 1996.  251p.  Notes p.237-246.  Index.  #5252  3.45

BF698.4.R57 1996   Riso, Don Richard, and Hudson, Russ.  Personality types: using the Enneagram for self-discovery.  Rev. ed.  Houghton Mifflin, 1966.  514p., diagrams.  Bibliography p.496-497.  #1969  5.35

BF698.5.J37 1996   Janda, Louis A. The psychologist’s book of self-tests : 25 love, sex, inelligence, career and personality tests developed to reveal the real you. A Perigrene Book, c1996. x, 230p. Contains bibliographical references. Questions and answers. #13686 7.30

BF698.9.C8S57 1972   Skinner, Burrhus Frederic, 1904-1990.  Beyond freedom and dignity.  Bantam/Vintage, 1972 c1971.  215p.  Notes p.207-215.  #5727  .15

BF698.95.F85 2012   Fuentes, Agustin.    Race, monogamy, and other lies they told you: busting myths about human nature. University of California Press, c2012. xv, 274p. photos, maps, diagrams. List of Illustrations p. vii. Acknowledgements p. xv-xvi. Getting the Information Yourself p. 217-220. Notes p.221-250. Bibliography p.251-264. Index #16202 2.60

BF701.M67 1970   Morris, Desmond.  The human zoo.  Dell Publishing Co.: A Delta Book, 1970 c1969.  256p.  Appendix: Literature p.249-251.  Bibliography p.252-256.  #12245  .25

BF710.B94 1990   Bykofsky, Sheree.  Me: five years from now: a planner 220personal growth and advancement.  Created by the Stonesong Press, Inc.  Time Warner: Warner Books, c1990.  vi, 248p.  Selected Resources p.246-248.  #12988  .25

BF711.K63 1968   Koestler, Arthur, 1905-                     The ghost in the machine.  The Macmillan Company, 1968 c1967.  xiv, 384p.  #10372  1.10

BF713.E74 1982   Erikson, Erik Hamburger, 1902-     The life cycle completed: a review. W. W. Norton & Company, c1985. 108p. References p.105-108. #13904 .50

BF721.P5 1951   Piaget, Jean, 1896-1980.  The child’s conception of the world.  Translated by Joan & Andrew Tomlinson.  Littlefield Adams Quality Paperback, 1951 c1929.  397p.  Bibliographical footnotes.  Indexes.  #1956  3.20

BF723.C5D42 1993   de Bono, Edward, 1933-         Teach your children to think. Penguin Books, 1993, c1962. vi, 313p. #16183 2.15

BF723.E6G74 1985   Greenspan, Stanley and Greenspan, Nancy Thorndike.  First feelings: milestones in the emotional development of your baby and child.  Penguin Books, 1985.  304p.  Appendix: Charting your Baby’s Emotional Milestones p.282-287.  Bibliography p.288-300.  Index.  #1241  .32

BF723.I6K33 1978   Kaplan, Louise J.  Oneness and separateness: from infant to individual.  Simon & Schuster: Touchstone Book, 1978.  288p.  Bibliographical notes p.249-280.  Index. #1034  2.11

BF723.I6.W46 1975   White, Burton L.  First three years of life.  Prentice-Hall, 1975.  285p.  Recommended Readings p.267-275.  Index.  #991  .16

BF723.J63.S34 1991   Schulman, Michael.  Passionate mind: bringing up an intelligent and creative child.  Macmillan: Free Press, 1991.  352p.  Notes p.310-344.  Index.  #1120  .95

BF723.S43K57 1992   Klagsbrun, Francine.  Mixed feelings: love, hate, rivalry and reconciliation among brothers and sisters.  Bantam Books, 1992.  428p.  Suggested Readings p.417-420.  Index.  #5178  .20

BF724.A42 1988   Ames, Louise Bates; Ilg, Frances L.; and Baker, Sidney M.  Your ten- to fourten-year-old.  Gesell Institute of Human Development.  Delta, 1989 c1988.  Portions appeared in a different form in Youth: the years from ten to sixteen, c1956.  xiv, 346p.  Notes p.337-338.  Index.  #9610  .60

BF724.8.T6813 1972   Tournier, Paul.  Learn to grow old.  Harper & Row, 1972.  viii, 248p.  Notes p.242-248.  #10005  .55

BF724.85.C64D5 1994   Donovan, Priscilla and Wonder, Jacquelyn.  The forever mind: eight ways to unleash the powers of your mature mind.  William Morrow: Quill, 1994.  269p., tables, appendices.  Bibliography p.253-260.  Index.  #7100  3.15

BF733.F72 1946   Freud, Sigmund, 1856-1939.  Totem and taboo: resemblances between the psychic lives of savages and neurotics.  Authorized translation with an introduction by A.A. Brill.  Random House: Vintage, 1946.  207p.  #1990  1.60

BF755.A5R5 1953   Reisman, David; with Nathan Glazer and Revel Denny.  Lonely crowd:  a study of the changing American character.  Abridged by the authors.  Doubleday: Anchor Books, 1953.  359p., bibl. footnotes  Index. #1081  .27

BF768.P7 1989   Priestley, John Boynton, 1894-1984.   Man and time.  Crescent Books, 1989 c1964.  319p., illus. (part color), index, illustration credits.  #504  8.50

BF773.S54 2011   Shermer, Michael. The believing brain: from ghosts and gods to politics and conspiracies – how we construct beliefs and reinforce them as truths. Henry Holt and Company/Times Books, c2011. xiv, 386p., illus: photos, drawings, graphs. Notes p.345-368. Acknowledgements p.369-371. Index. About the Author p.386.  #14402 11.85

BF773.S56 1997   Shermer, Michael.  Why people believe wierd things: pseudoscience, superstition, and other confusions of our time.  Foreword by Stephen Jay Gould.  W.H. Freeman & Company, 1997.  306p, photos, facismilies, drawings, graphs.  Bibliography p.279-293.  Index.  #5954  5.35

BF773.T46 2008   Thompson, Damian, 1962-        Counter knowledge: how we surrender to conspiracy themes, quack medicine, bogus science and fake history. W.W. Norton & Company, c2008. x, 162p. Acknowledgements p.18. Notes p.141-156. Further Reading p.157-162. #16189 1.00

BF789.D4.K8 1970  Kubler-Ross, Elisabeth.   On death and dying.  Macmillan, 1970 c1969.  289p.  Bibliography p.279-289.  #1002.  .16

BF798.G35 1996   Gallagher, Winifred.  Just the way you are: how heredity and experience create the individual.  Random House, 1996; 1st published as I.D.  234p.  Suggested Readings p.211-221.  Index.  #5476  3.20

BF818.B764 2015   Brooks, David, 1961-        The road to character. Random House, c2015. viii, 301p. Acknowledgements p.271-273. Nots p.275-284. Permission Credits p.285-286. Index. About the Author p.301. #16180 8.00

BF833.A4 1965   Adler, Alfred, 1870-1937.  Understanding human nature.  Translated by W. Beran Wolfe.  Fawcett Publications: Premier, 1965 c1954; 1st published 1927.  224p.  #1477  .32

BF1003.E73   Eranos-Jarbuch: papers from the yearbooks. Edited by Joseph Campbell. Selected and translated from the Eranos Jahrbücher by Olga Frobe Kapleyn. Princeton University Press, 1954-1968. 6v. illus. (Bollingen Series; 30). Have v.4, 1960, Spiritual disciplines. (xxli, 566p.). #16138 gift

BF1031.E9 1962   Eysenck, H       J.  Sense and nonsense in psychology.  Penguin Books, 1962 c1957.  349p., Recommended four Further Reading p.340  Index.  #1137  .55

BF1078.J57 1986   Johnson, Robert A.  Inner work: using dreams and active imagination for personal growth.  HarperCollins: Harper San Francisco, 1989 c1986.  223p.  Bibliography p.223.  #1501  1.91

BF1091.L53 2002 Ref   Lewis, James R.  The dream encyclopedia.  Visible Ink, c2002; 1st published c1995.  416p., illus.  Contains Bibliographical References at ends of articles.  [Articles] p.1-266.  Dream Symols p.269-374.  Dream Resources p.375-392.  #13304  1.05

BF1091.M648 1987 Ref   Miller, Gustavus Hindman, 1857-    10,000 dreams interprted; or, What’s in a dream.  A scientific and practical expolsition.  Rand McNally & Company, 1987, 16th printing; 1st published 1901.  617p., xviip.  Index.  #13073  1.10

BF1091.M794 2005   Moss, Robert, 1946-   Dreamways of the Iroquois: honoring the secret wishes of the soul.  Destiny Books, c2005.  x, 278p.  Glossary of Iroquois Words p.259-263.  Bibliography p.264-272.  Index.  #13142  Exchange

BF1407.N3 1994 Ref   Natof, André.  The Wordsworth dictionary of the occult.  Wordsworth Reference, 1994 c1991; 1st published 1988 as Les maîtres de l’occultisme.  241p., illus.  Glossary p.231-233.  Index.  #5461  4.25

BF1407.S6 1988 Ref   Spence, Lewis.   The encyclopedia of the occult.  A compendium of information….  Bracken Books, 1988.  451p., illus, index.  #427.  6.89

BF1411.K55 1970   King, Bruce. The encyclopedia of ancient and forbidden knowledge by Zolar: the complete guide to the occult. Nash Publishing, c1970. 446p., diagrams, tables. Appendix: The Hebrew Alphabet p.429-434. The Kabbalistic Manifestations of the Astral World p.435-436. Methods of Prediction p.437. The Ancient Psychic and Occult Sciences p.438-446. #13671 .55

BF1421.D6 1957   Dodds, Eric Robertson, 1893-   The Greeks and the irrational.  Beacon Press, 1957 c1951.  vii, 327p.  Notes at the ends of each chapter.  Index.  #12328  4.00

BF1517.F5H8 1996   Huxley, Aldous, 1894-1963.  The devils of Loudon.  Barnes & Noble, 1996 c1952.  340p.  Bibliography p.329-330.  Index.  #5209  3.70

BF1531.M26 1999 Ref   Mack, Carol K. and Mack, Dinah.  A field guide to demons, fairies, fallen angels, and other subversive spirits.  Henry Holt: An Owl Book, 1999 c1998.  xxxvii, 296p., drawings.  Bibliography p.275-283.  Index.  #10347.  10.05

BF1555.O45 1966   Oesterreich, T. K.   Possession, demonical & other.  Lyle Stuart, 1966.  380p., bibliographical notes.  #424.  1.95

BF1559.E25 1974   Exorcism: fact not fiction.   Edited and with an introduction by Martin Ebon.  New American Library: Signet, 1974.  274p.  #426.  1.25

BF1559.E9 1974   Exorcism and the demonic, an investigation of  mysterious experience.  From  the publishers of Man, Myth and Magic.  Marshall Cavendish, 1974.  64p., illus.  #425.  1.95

BF1566.M37 2007   Martin, Lois. The history of witchcraft. Book Sales, Inc.: Chartwell Books, Inc., c2007. 144p. Illustrations on endpapers. Further Reading p.133-135. Websites p.137. Index. #16149 2.10

BF1566.M8 1970   Murray, Margaret A.  The god of the witches.  Oxford University Press, 1970 c1952.  212p., plates, drawings.  References p.198-207.  Index.  #10895  .25

BF1576.B6 1974   Boyer, Paul and Nissenbaum, Stephen.  Salem possessed: the social origins of witchcraft.  Harvard University Press, 1974.  231p., maps, bibliographical footnotes.  Index.  #1898.  55

BF1576.K37 1989  Karlsen, Carol F., 1940-                  The devil in the shape of a woman: witchcraft in colonial New England.  Random House: Vintage Books, 1989 c1987.  xx, 360p., statistical tables.  Notes p.265-342.  Index.   #13380  .70

BF1576.S8 1969   Starkey, Marion L.  The deveil in Massachusetts: a modern enquiry into the Salem witch trials.  Doubleday & Company: Anchor Books, 1969 c1949.  310p.  Selected Bibliography p.292-301.  Index.  #9577  .50

BF1576.T39 1995   Taylor, John Metcalf, 1845-1915.  Witchcraft delusion: the story of the witchcraft persecutions in seventeenth century New England, including original trial transcripts.  Gramercy Books, 1995; 1st published 1908.  164p.  Index  #5127  4.25

BF1589.T4 1971   Thompson, Charles John Samuel, 1862-1943.  The mysteries and secrets of magic.  The Olympia Press, 1972 c1927.  xviii, 320p., drawings and diagrams.  Bibliography p.315-316.  Index.  #8039  .65

BF1622.C45C66 1997   Conway, Deanna J.  Celtic magic.  Llewellyn Publications, 1997 c1990.  xiv, 208p., drawings, diagrams, charts.  (Llewelleyn’s World Magic Series).  Tables of Correspondence p.179-202.  Bibliography p.203-208.  #12818  .15

BF1623.B7K47 1961   Kueshana, Eklal.  The ultimate frontier.  Stelle Group, 1961.  224p. [title page added]  #4150  .59

BF1623.P9D54 1988  Dodge, Ellen.  Numerology has your number.  Simon & Schuster: A Fireside Book, 1988.  350p., tables.  Bibliography p.348-50.  #461  1.85

BF1751.S48 1997 Ref   Shaw, Eva, 1947-               The Wordsworth book of diving the future.  Wordsworth Reference, 1997; 1st published as Diving the future c1995.  ix, 293p., illus.  Further Reading after articles.  Index.  #10834  3.65

BF1775.D63 1999 Ref   A dictionary of superstitions.  Edited by Iona Opie and Moira Tatem.  Barnes & Noble, 1999 c1989.  xiii, 494p.  Select Bibliography p.455-462.  Analytical Index p.463-494.  #9827  5.35

BF1809.F4 1964   Festinger, Leon, Riecken, Henry W., and Schachter, Stanley.  When prophecy fails: a social and psychological study of a modern group that predicted the destruction of the world.  Harper & Row: Harper Torchbook/The Academy Library, 1964 c1956.  253p.  Index.  #1899  .55

BF1815.N8W2 1940   Ward, Charles A.  Oracles of Nostradamus.  The Modern Library, c1940.  366p.  Index.  #3781  npg

BF1999.F75 1989   The fringes of reason: a whole earth catalog.  Edited by Ted Schultz.  Foreword by Stuart Brand.  Harmony Books, 1989.  223p., illus, photos, drawings  Index.  #1041.  .95

BF1999.T517 1989   Thompson, William Irwin.  Imaginary landscape: make believe worlds of myth and science.  St. Martins press, 1989.  198p., bibl. footnotes  Index.  #1221  .95

BH61.T78 1971   Toward an aesthetic education.  A report of an Institute sponsored by CEMREL Inc., held in conjunction with the MENC National Biennial Convention, 1970, Chicago…  MENC, c1971.  vii, 190p., black and white photos, charts.  Bibliography p.170-190.  #11359  .30

BH181.B8 1990   Burke, Edmund, 1729-1797.  A philosophical enquiry into the origin of our ideas of the sublime and the beautiful.  Edited with an introduction by Adams Phillips.  Oxford University Press, 1990; 1st published 1757.  173p., footnotes, explanatory notes p.163-173.  #1347  8.47

BH205.O713 1972   Ortega y Gasset, José,   The dehumanization of art and other essays on art, culture, and literature.  1st Princeton paperback ed.  Princeton University Press, 1972 c1968; 1st pub. 1949 as The dehumanization of art and Notes on the novel; translated by Helene Weyl from La Dehumanication del arte e Ideas sobre la vovela; published 1925.  [iv], 204p.  Contains 3 essays published in Partisan Review.  #12297  8.55

BH301.N3S45 1972   Shepard, Paul.   Man in the landscape: a historic view of the aesthetics of nature.  Ballantine, 1972 c1967.  296p.  Sources & references p.272-289  Index.  #485  1.59

BJ21.T4 1967   Theories of ethics.  Edited by Philippa Foot.  Oxford University Press, 1967.  188p. (Oxford readings in philosophy).  Bibliography p. 185-187.  Index of Names.  #1250  .30

BJ41.W4 1961   Wellman,Carl. The language of ethics. Harvard University Press, c1961. x, 328p. Bibliography p.309-321. Index. #12778 1.10

BJ45.F7 1965   Fromm, Erich, 1900-1980.   Man for himself; an inquiry into the psychology of ethics.  Fawcett: Premier, 1965 c1947.  256p.  Index.  #113  .95

BJ45.F68 1971   Fromm, Erich, 1900-1980.  The heart of man: its genius for good and evil.  With an epilogue by Ruth Nanda Ansher.  Perennial Library, 1971 c1964.  212p., index.  (Religious Perspectives, v.12).  #7556  1.10

BJ45.H25 2013   Haidt, Jonathan, 1963-      The righteous mind: why good people are divided by politics and religion. Random House, Inc.: Vintage Books, 2013 c2012. xxiv, 501p., photos, drawings, diagrams. Acknowledgements p.373-376. Notes p.377-449. References p.451-490. Index. Illustration Credits p.501.  #15047 16.90

BJ47.L5 1964   Lippmann, Walter, 1889-1974.  A preface to morals; with a new introduction by Sidney Hook.  Time Inc., 1964 c1957; 1st published 1929.  328p.  Notes p.313-318.  Index.  #5283  .25

BJ71.B66 1970   Bourke, Vernon Joseph, 1907-       History of ethics.  Doubleday & Company, 1970 c1968.  2v. (314, 312p.)  Bibliography v.1 p.283-314; v.2 p.237-284.  Index.  #11595, 11956  6.40

BJ71.M3 1998   MacIntyre, Alasdair (Chalmers) 1929-        A short history of ethics: a history of moral philosophy from the Homeric age to the twentieth century. 2nd ed. University of North Dakota Press, 1998, 1st published, x1996. xxiv, 280p. [New] Preface p.vii-xix. Notes p.271-280. #16329 8.15

BJ71.N45 2008   Neiman, Susan,1955-        Moral clarity: a guide for grown-up idealists. Harcourt, Inc., c2008. xii, 467p. Acknowledgements p.431-432. Bibliographical Notes p.433-439. Bibliography p.441-449. Permissions p.451. Index. #16241 8.50

BJ158.L2A56 1979 Ref   The Ann Landers encyclopedia, A to Z: improve your life emotionally, medically, sexually, socially, spiritually.  Ballantine, 1979 c1978.  1212p., bibliographical references, index.  #5419r  1.90

BJ214.S3E5 1995   Seneca, Lucius Annaeus, 4 B.C.E.-65 C.E.  Moral and political essays.  Edited and translated by John M. Cooper and J. F. Procopé.  Cambridge University Press, 1995.  xl, 324p.  Biographical Notes p.309-313.  Bibliographical notes in footnotes.  Index.  #7194  10.65

BJ214.S4E73 1969   Seneca, Lucius Annaeus, 4 B.C.E.-65 C.E.  Letters from a Stoic: epistulae morales ad Lucilium.  Selected and translated with an introduction by Robin Campbell.  Penguin Books, 1969.  254p.  Bibliography p.241.  Index of Persons and Places.  #7170  3.20

BJ1005.H8 1957   Hume, David, 1711-1776.  An inquiry concerning the principles of morals.  With a supplement: a dialogue.  Edited with an introduction by Charles W. Hendel.  Bobbs-Merrill: The Library of Liberal Arts, 1957; 1st published 1751.  158p.  Selected Bibliography p.lx-lxii.  #1251  .30

BJ1011.B27 1969   Mandelbaum, Maurice H., 1908-          The phenomenology of moral experience.  paperback ed.  The Johns Hopkins Press, 1969; 1st published 1955.  336p.  Notes p.311-334.  Index.  #7543  1.00

BJ1011.E34 1965   Edwards, Paul.  The logic of moral discourse.  With an introduction by Sidney Hook.  Free Press, 1965 c1955.  248p.  Bibliography p.243-246.  Index.  #5148  1.10

BJ1011.N68 1964  Nowell-Smith, Patrick Horace, 1914-      Ethics.  Penguin, 1964 c1954.  324p.  Bibliographic Footnotes.  Index.  #5030  1.05

BJ1012.H2364 1994   Halberstam, Joshua, 1946-         Everyday ethics: inspired solutions to real-life dilemmas.  Penguin Books, 1994 c1993.  xix, 204p.  #11363  3.20

BJ1012.R29 1993   Rachels, James.  The elements of moral philosophy.  2d ed.  McGraw-Hill, 1993; 1st published 1986.  xiii, 216p.  Suggestions for Further Reading p.194-201.  Index.  #7525  .50

BJ1012.V45 1989   Vice & virtue in everyday life: introductory readings in ethics.  2d ed.  Edited by Christina and Fred Sommers.  Harcourt Brace Jovanovich, 1989.  849p.  Study Questions.  References & bibliographical footnotes.  #5321  .25

BJ1012.W5375 1995   Wilson, James Q.   The moral sense. The Free Press, 1995 c1993. xviii, 313p. Acknowledgements p. xvii-xbiii. Notes p.253-266. References p.267-300. Index.  #14357 .55

BJ1012.W55 1987   Wilson, John, 1928-      A preface to morality. Barnes and Noble Books, c1987. viii, 130p. References p.127-128. Index.  #14999 1.05

BJ1025.B56 1965   Black, Algernon D.  First book of ethics.  Drawings by Rick Schreiter.  Franklin Watts, 1965.  66p., illus.  Index.  #1523  .25

BJ1025.C75 1977   Conover, Charles Eugene. Personal ethics in an impersonal world. The Westminster Press, c1977. 159p. Notes p.148-156. Index.  #13892  2.75

BJ1025.D53 1960   Dewey, John, 1859-1952. Theory of the moral life. With an introduction by Arnold Isenberg. Holt, Rinehart & Winston c1973; redacted from Part II of Dewey and Tufts Ethics, rev. ed. 1932, 1st published 1908. xii, 179p. Contains bibliographical referencs and footnoes. Index.  #15789 .25

BJ1025.L5 1967   Lillie, William.  Introduction to ethics.  3d ed.  University Paperbacks, 1967 c1955.  342p.  Suggestions for Further Reading p.329-339.  Index.  #1717  1.60

BJ1031.C6 1991   Contemporary moral problems.  3rd ed.  [Edited by] James E. White.  West Publishisng Company, c1991.  ix, 476p.  Suggested Readings at ends of chapters.  Index.  #11416  .30

BJ1031.H37 2010   Harris, Sam. The moral landscape: how science can determine human values. Free Press, c2010. xii, 293p. Acknowledgements p.193-194. Notes p.195-238. References p.239-279. Index. About the Author p.293. #14322 12.95

BJ1063/B3813 1976   Beauvoir, Simone de, 1908-1986. The ethics of ambiguity. Translated from the French by Bernard Frahtman. Kensington Publishing Corp: Citadel Press c1976; 1st published 1948 as Pour une morale d’ambiguité. 162p.  #15723 5.80

BJ1212.M43 1993   Meeks, Wayne A.  The origins of Christian morality: the first two centuries.  Yale University Press, c1993.  x, 275p.  Bibliography of Secondary Works p.243-260.  Index of Early Christian Literature p.261-269.  Index.  #13306  3.15

BJ1231.R3 1962   Ramsey, Paul.  Nine modern moralists.  Prentice-Hall: A Spectrum Book, c1962.  vii, 271p.  Bibliographical footnotes.  Notes p.257-271.  Contents: Dostoevski; Marxism; Sartre, Reinhold Niebuhr; H. Richard Niebuhr; Paul Tillich; and Brunner, Maritain and Cohn.  #10916  4.30

BJ1249.O713 1968   Oraison, Marc.  Morality for our time.  Translated by Nels Challe.  Doubleday & Company, c1968.  140p.  #10896  .65

BJ1249.V3 1960   Vann, Gerald, 1906-          Morals and man.  2nd ed.  Sheed and Ward, c1960; 1st published c1937.  223p.  Bibliographical footnotes.  Index.  #12734  1.10

BJ1251.A37 1995   Allen, Joseph L. Love and conflict: a covenantal model of Christian ethics. University Press of America c1995; 1st published c1984. 336p. Note4s p.312-324. Indexes.  #14071 7.45

BJ1251.B43 1975   Bennett, John Coleman, 1902-      Radical imperative: from theology to social ethics.  Westminster Press, 1975.  208p.  Notes p.201-208.  #1915  .25

BJ1251.B74 1979   Brill, Earl H. The Christian moral vision. With the assistance of a group of advisors. Harper & Row Publishers, c1979. xviii, 236p. (The Church’s Teaching Series; 6). Notes p.222-225. Suggestions for Further Reading p.226-229. Index.  #14116b  .40

BJ1251.D275 2010   Davis, James Calvin. In defense of civility: how religion can unite America on seven moral issues that divide us. Westminster John Knox Press, c2010. xiv, 198p. Notes p.171-188. Index. #16308 2.20

BJ1251.E44 2000   Elford, R. John.   The ethics of uncertainty: a new Christian approach to moral decision-making. Oneworld, c2000. viii, 162p. Acknowledgements p.vii. Notes p.151-156. Index.  #14396 5.35

BJ1251.F53 1965   Fletcher, Joseph.  Situation ethics: the new morality.  Westminster Press, 1965.  176p., bibliographical footnotes, index.  #5594  .50

BJ1251.F6 1970   Forell, George Wolfgang.  Ethics of decision: an introduction to Christian ethics.  Fortress Press, 1970 c1955.  xviii, 158p.  Bibliography p.156-158.  #15525  .50

BJ1251.N38 1996   Nelson, James B.  Moral nexus: ethics of Christian identity and community.  25th anniversary ed.  Westminster John Knox Press, 1996.  xvii, 232p.  Notes p.198-226.  Index.  #12304  3.20

BJ1251.N52 1963   Niebuhr, H(elmut) Richaard (Reinhold), 1894-1962. The responsible self: an essay in Christian moral philosophy. Introduction by James M. Gustafson. Foreword by William Schweiker. Westminster John Knox Press, c1963; Foreword c1999. xvi, 183p. (Library of Theological Ethics). Index. #16171 6.15

BJ1251.N54 2015   Niebuhr, (Karl Paul) Reinhold, 1892-1971. Reinhold Niebuhr: major works on religion and politics. Elizabeth Sifton, editor. The Library of America, c2015. 962p. Chronology p.891-903. Note on the Texts p.904-908. Notes p.909-940. Index. #1658r 30.90

BJ1251.045 1985   Ogletree, Thomas W.  Hospitality to the stranger: dimensions of moral understanding.  Fortress Press, c1985.  xiii, 162p.  Bibliography p.151-154.  Indexes.  #11705  4.25

BJ1251.P76 1998   The promise of Lutheran ethics.  Karen L. Bloomquist and John R. Stumme, Editors.  Fortress Press, c1998.  vii, 247p.  Bibliogrpy of Lutheran Ethics, by J. R. Stumme p.208-240.  Index.  #11368  20.25

BJ1251.R3 1956   Rasmussen, Albert Terrill.  Christian social ethics: exerting Christian influence.  Prentice-Hall, c1956.  xvi, 318p.  Bibliographical footnotes.  Recommended Readings at the ends of chapters.  Index.  #12965  1.00

BJ1251.W58 1976   Wogaman, J. Phillip.  A Christian method of moral judgment.  The Westminster Press, 1976.  xi, 270p.  Notes p.241-263.  Index.  #11004  .25

BJ1253.B61513 1995   Bonhoeffer, Dietrich, 1906-1945.  Ethics.  Simon & Schuster: A Touchstone Book, 1995; first published 1955.  Translated by Neville Horton Smith from Ethik, 1949.  380p., indexes.  #5446  4.25

BJ1311.H87 2004   Huxley, Thomas Henry, 1825-1895.  Evolution and ethics.  Science and morals.  Prometheus Books, 2004; 1st published 1896.  xii, 146p.  (Great Minds Series).  #13285  6.40

BJ1311.W9 1961   Wylie, Philip, 1902-1971.  An essay on morals: a science of philosophy and a philosophy of the sicnce, a popular explanation of the Jungian theory of human instict, a new Bible for the bold mind and a way to personal peace by logic, the heretic’s handbook and text for honest skeptics, including a description of man suitable for an atomic age together with a compendium of means to brotherhood for a better world and a voyage beyond the opposite directions of religion and objective truth, to understanding.  Pocket Books: Cardinal Edition, 1961 c1951; first published c1947.  xxviii, 193p.  #11990  3.20

BJ1360.M5 1969   Moral problems in contemporary society: essays in humanistic ethics.  Edited by Paul Kurtz.  Prentice-Hall, 1969.  301p.  Bibliographic footnotes.  #1524  .25

BJ1401.N44 2007   Needleman, Jacob. Why can’t we be good? Penguin Group: Jeremy P. Tarcher, c2007. [xx] 285p. Acknowledgements p.[xiii-xiv]. For Further Reading p.265-273. Notes p.275-278. Index. #14016 6.90

BJ1406.C32 1956   Camus, Albert, 1913-1960.  Rebel: an essay on man in revolt.  With a foreword by Sir Herbert Read.  A rev. and complete translation of L’Homme Révollé by Anthony Bower.  Random House: Vintage Books, 1956; 1st published in France, 1951.  306p.  #1395  3.76

BJ1406.W37 1995   Watson, Lyall, 1939-2008. Dark nature: a natural history of evil. HarperCollinsPublishers, c1995. xvi, 318p. Bibliography p.293-308. Index.  #15822 2.15

BJ1419.K53 2009   Kidder, Rushworth M(oulton), 1944-2012. How good people make tough choices: resolving the dilemmas of ethical living. Harper, 2003; c1995. Preface, 2009. xvi, 255p. Notes p.233-247. Index. #16375 2.15

BJ1421.B64 1979   Bok, Sissela.  Lying: moral choice in public and private life.  Random House: Vintage Books, 1979 c1978.  xxiv, 354p.  Select Bibliography p.335-337.  Index.  #13023  .25

BJ1451.E97 1994   Eyre, Linda and Richard.  Teaching your children responsibility.  Simon & Schuster: A Fireside Book, 1994 c1984.  185p., photos, charts, index.  #1504  1.91

BJ1461.D427 2003   Dennett, Daniel C.  Freedom evolves.  Penguin Group: Viking, c2003.  xvi, 347p., diagrams, charts.  Notes on Sources and Further Reading p.308-309.  Bibliography p.311-324.  Index.  #13104  7.45

BJ1461.E3 1966   Edwards, Jonathan, 1703-1758.  Freedom of the will.  Edited by Paul Ramsey.  Yale University Press, 1966 c1957.  4.94p.  Bigliographic footnotes.  Indexes.  #1460  2.12

BJ1461.H27 1975   Hampshire, Stuart, 1974-          Freedom of the individual.  Expanded ed.  Princeton University Press, 1975.  142p.  #5585  2.00

BJ1468.5.K8s 1968   Kurtz, Paul.  Decision and the condition of man.  Dell: A Delta Book, 1968 c1965.  viii, 314p.  Selected Bibliography of Works Cited p.303-310.  Index.  #7650  1.70

BJ1471.A468 1982   Amato, Joseph Anthony.  Guilt and gratitude: a study of the origins of contemporary conscience.  Foreword by Thaddeus C. Radzialowski.  Greenwood Press, 1982.  218p.  Selected bibliography p.205-212.  (Contributions in philosophy, no.20)  #1531 gift

BJ1474.A475 2005   Altruism in world religions. Jacob Neusner and Bruce Chilton, Editors. Georgetown University Press, c2005. xiv, 202p. Bibliographies at the ends of chapters. Contributors p.195-196. Acknowledgements p.197. Index. #16379 3.20

BJ1474.O4 1965   Olson, Robert Goodwin, 1924-       The morality of self-interest. Harcourt, Brace & World, Inc., c1965. x, 182p. Contains bibliographical footnotes. Acknowledgements p.vii. Index. #14377 6.40

BJ1474.R3 1964   Rand, Ayn, 1905-1982.   The virtue of selfishness; a new concept of egoism.  With additional articles by Nathaniel Branden.  New American Library: Signet, 1964.  144p.  #43  .60

BJ1477.S45 1990   Seligman, Martin E.P.  Learned optimism.  Knopf, 1990.  319p.  Notes p.293-303.  Index.  #506  20.54

BJ1480.T4813 1983   Thomas, Aquinas, Saint, 1225?-1274.  Treatise on happiness.  Translated by John A. Oesterle.  University of Notre Dame Press, c1964.  xvi, 208p.   (Notre Dame Series in the Great Books).  Summa Theologiae, Second Part, Part 1, Questions 1-21 of the treatises on happiness and on human action.  #10692  12.30

BJ1496.A53 1998   Andrews, Cecile. The circle of simplicity: return to the good life. HarperCollinsPublishers: Harper Perennial, 1998 c1947. xxiv, 256p. TheHow of Study Circles p.219-241. Afterword p.243-247. Bibliography p.249-254. Acknowledgements p.255-256. #15753 .75

BJ1496.E356 1981b   Elgin, Duane.   Voluntary simplicity: toward a way of life that is outwardly simple, inwardly rich.  William Morrow, 1981.  312p.  References p.297-303.  Index.  #456.  .95

BJ1498.P513 1963   Pieper, Josef.  Leisure: the basis of culture.  Translated by Alexander Dree, with an introduction by T.S. Eliot.  New American Library: Mentor, 1963.  127p.  Notes p.65-68, 126-127.  1st published as Musse und Kult and Was heisst philosophieren?  #1478  .32

BJ1499.S65 1996   Smsithson, Judith Ann.  Smithson’s island: the necessity of solitude.  Lone Oak Press, 1996.  109p.  Review  #5844

BJ1521.B73 2009   Bradshaw, John. Reclaiming virtue: how we can develop the moral intelligence to do the right thing at the right time for the right reason. Bantam Books c2009. xii, 516p., diagrams, tables. Selected Readings p.485-498. Acknowledgements p.499-500. Index. About the Author p.415-516.  #14320 10.95

BJ1521.C6613 2001   Comte-Sponville, André.  A small treatise on the great virtues: the uses of philsophy in everyday life.  Translated by Catherine Terson.  Henry Holt & Company: Metropolitan Books, c2001; 1st published as Petit Traité des Grandes Vertus, c1996.  x, 352p.  Notes p.291-339.  Index.  #12021  7.50

BJ1533.C74F58 2002   Flinders, Carol Lee. The values of belonging: rediscovering balance, mutuality, intuition and wholesomeness in a competitive world. HarperCollinsPublishers/HarperSanFrancisco, c2002. xxxii, 224p. Notes p.209-214. Acknowledgements p.215-216. Index.  #14382 1.10

BJ1533.C8T5 1952   Tillich, Paul, 1886-1965.   The courage to be.  Yale University Press, 1952.  197p.  #44  .95

BJ1533.F2W66 2011   Woodruff, Paul, 1943-       The Ajax dilemma: justice, fairness, and rewards. With an afterword by C. Cale McDowell. Oxford University Press, c2011. xiv, 251p. Acknowledgements p.xiii-xiv. Notes at the ends of chapters. Bibliography p.241-245. Index.  #15826 17.15

BJ1533.F8M3 1980   Marty, Martin E.  Friendship.  DLM: Argus Communications, 1980.  226p., drawings.  #5586  3.15

BJ 1533.F8W33 1989   Wadell, Paul J.  Friendship and the moral life.  University of Notre Dame Press, 1989.  189p.  Notes p.168-182.  Index.  #5884  .50

BJ1533.I58C37 1997   Carter, Stephen L., 1954-                        Integrity.  HarperCollinsPublishers: Harper Perennial, 1997 c1996.  x, 277p.  Bibliography p.243-263.  Index.  #12221  7.50

BJ1533.R42D88 1994   Duvall, Lynn.  Respecting our differences: a guide to getting along in a changing world.  Edited by Pamela Espeland.  Free Spirit Publishing, 1994.  199p., drawings, black and white phtos.  Bibliography p.183-188.  Index.  #1328  Review

BJ1535.S4C65 1991   Collier, James Lincoln.  The rise of selfishness in America.  Oxford University Press, 1991.  308p.  Notes p.265-295.  Index.  #5715  3.70

BJ1548.T48 2007  This I blieve: the personal philosophies of remarkable men and women. Edited by Jay Allison and Dan Gediman … Foreword by Studs Terkel. Henry Holt and Company: A Holt Paperback, c2007. xxvi, 291p. Appendices: A. Introducton to the 1950s Series, Edward R. Murrow p.269-271. B. How to Write Your Own This I Believe p.272-273. c. How to Use This I Believe in Your Community p.274-275. Acknowledgements p.276-281. Discussion Questions p.297-291.  #13875  7.50

BJ1581.2.B72 1974   Browne, Harry, 1933-                 How I found freedom in an unfree world.  Avon Books, 1974 c1973.  407p.  Glossary p.389-393.  Recommended Reading p.395-399.  Index.  #10927  .50

BJ1581.2.G575 2003   Gomes, Peter John, 1942-2011. The good life: truths that last in times of need. HarperCollinsPublishers: HarperSanFrancisco, 3003 c2002. viii, 375p. Acknowledgements p.vii-viii. Notes p.357-364. Index. Permissions p.374-375.  #14115 1.10

BJ1581.2.H616 2009   Hollis, James, 1940-      What matters most: living a more considered life. Penguin Group: Gotham Books, c2009. xviii, 270p. Bibliography p.257-260. Index.   #14326 7.50

BJ1581.2.L39 1980   Le Boeuf, Michael.   Working smart: how to accomplish more in half the time.  Warner Books, 1980 c1979.  272p.  Index.  #932  .25

BJ1581.2G575 2003   Gomes, Peter J. The good life: truths that last in times of need. Harper Collins Publishers/Harper San Francisco, 2003, c2002. viii, 375p. Acknowledgements p. vii-viii. Notes p.357-364. Index.  #14115 1.10

BJ1604.C44 1948    Castiglione, Baldassare, 1478-1529.   The book of the courtier.  Translated by Sir Thomas Hoby.  Introduction by W.H.D. Rouse and critical notes by Drayton Henderson.  Dutton: Everyman’s Library, 1948 c1928; 1st publshed in this translation, 1561 from the edition of 1528.  324p., xviii.  Bibliography p. x-xi.  #1741  2.50

BJ1604.C44 1959   Castiglione, Baldassare, 1478-1529.   The book of the courtier; a new translation.  Doubleday: Anchor Books, 1959.  387p., illus., notes  Index.  #45  1.45

BJ1611.2.S43 1989   Shames, Laurence.   Hunger for more: searching for values in an age of greed.  Times Books, 1989.  291p., bibl. notes p.260-283  Index.  #510  3.17

BJ1661.Z37 1982   Zerafa, Judy.   Go for it!  Workman Publishing, 1982.  155p.  #501.  2.11

BJ1671.C52 1957   Chesterfield, Philip Dorner Stanhope, 4th Earl, Lord, 1694-1773.  Lord Chesterfield’s letters to his son and others.  Introduction by R. K. Koot.  Dent, 1957 c1929.  314p.  #5916  2.00

BJ1583.F95 2002   Forni, P. M.  Choosing civility: the twenty-five rules of considerate conduct.  St. Martin’s Press, c2002.  xii, 196p.  Suggestions for Further Reading p.195-196.  #12360  2.10

BJ1725.M39 2001   May, William F.  Beleaguered rulers: the public obligation of the professional.  Westminster John Knox Press, c2001.  x, 286p.  Notes at ends of chpaters.  Acknowledgements p.275-277.  Index.  #12730  6.00

BJ1853.C23 2000   Caldwell, Mark.  A short history of rudeness: manners, morals, and misbehavior in modern America.  Picador USA, 2000 c1999.  [xii], 274p.  Acknowledgements p. [viii].  Nortes p.245-264.  Index.  #12957  1.05

BJ1853.F95 2002   Forni, P. M. Choosing civility: the twenty-five rules of considerate conduct. St. Martin’s Press, c2002. xii, 196p. Suggestions for Further Reading p.195-196. #12360 2.10

BJ1853.V28 1974 Ref   Vanderbilt, Amy.  Amy Vanderbilt’s everyday etiquette.   Answers to today’s etiquette questions.  2d rev. ed.  Drawings by Mary Sedzuki and Andrew Warhol.  Bantam Books, 1974 c1967.  290p.  Index.  #950  .10

BJ1921.D44 1958   Della Casa, Giovanni, 1503-1556.  Galateo; or, the book of manners.  A new translation by R.S. Pine-Coffin.  Penguin Books, c1958.  131p.  #11779  1.20

BJ2121.B59 2009   Blyth, Catherine. The art of conversation: a guided tour of a neglected pleasure. Gothard Books c2009. viii, 2888p. Acknowledgements p.283-284. Select Bibliography p.285-2888. #14280 4.20

BJ2121.G3 2001   Gabor, Don. How to start a conversation and make friends. Revised & updated. Illustrations by Mary Powers. Simon & Schuster: A Fireside Book, c2001. 208p. Acknowledgements p.7. Index. #16235 2.15

BJ2121.M76 1976   Morris, James A.  The art of conversation: magic key to personal and social popularity.  Parker Publishing Co., Inc., c1976.  207[/  #13114  .30